Revit MEP 2009

Imperial Tutorial

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Secondary Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System . Creating the Primary System Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Primary System Equipment . . . . . . . . . Inspecting and Color Coding the System . . . . . . . . . Creating Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Electrical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 31 . 35 . 39 . 45 . 47 . 47 . 57 . 60 . 63 . 72

Developing Your MEP Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

v

Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 77 . 88 . 94 . 95

Chapter 4

Mechanical Systems: Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . 101 . 108 . 112 . 136 . 141 . 148 . 153 . 156 . 160 . 162 . 168 . 185

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems: Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 . 189 . 196 . 200 . 204 . 217 . 230 . 249 . 252 . 260 . 263

Chapter 6

Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 269 . 274 . 280 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 291 . 296 . 303 . 304 . 309 . 314 . 320 . 325 . 331 . 338

Chapter 7

Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 . 344 . 345 . 346

vi | Contents

Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 346 . 352 . 359 . 371 . 376 . 382 . 390 . 398

Chapter 8

Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 . 406 . 410 . 432 . 445 . 451 . 458

Chapter 9

Creating Revit MEP Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Modifying Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Fan Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family . Modifying Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Water Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Light Fixture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol Family . . . . . . . . . . . . Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 . 470 . 474 . 483 . 488 . 491 . 493 . 498 . 498 . 507 . 518 . 555 . 561 . 561 . 568 . 568 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 571 . 571

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . 577 . 582 . 589 . 595 . 599 . 599 . 602 . 605 . 607 . 610 . 615 . 615

Contents | vii

Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Chapter 11

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 . 631 . 637 . 641 . 644 . 644 . 649 . 651 . 654 . 656 . 662 . 670 . 673 . 673 . 675 . 678 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 684

Chapter 12

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 . 688 . 692 . 692 . 702 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 713

Chapter 13

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 . 720 . 727 . 731 . 732 . 735 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 742 . 743 . 745

Chapter 14

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 . 761 . 767 . 767 . 769

viii | Contents

Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 769 . 773 . 779 . 779 . 781 . 783 . 784 . 790 . 791 . 791 . 792

Chapter 15

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Chapter 16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 . 815 . 823 . 827 . 830 . 830 . 833 . 836 . 836

Chapter 17

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 . 840 . 840 . 844 . 848 . 851 . 856

Chapter 18

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . 862 . 872 . 879

Chapter 19

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 . 894 . 903 . 906

Contents | ix

Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 908 . 911 . 911 . 913 . 916 . 918 . 919

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Chapter 21 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 . 925 . 927 . 929 . 930 . 933 . 933 . 937 . 939 . 942 . 947 . 949 . 950 . 953 . 953 . 954 . 959 . 961 . 964 . 965 . 967

x | Contents

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.

3

■ ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. 10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2009?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

Understanding the Basics | 5

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2009 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows, doors, and cabinets are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You

Understanding the Basics | 7

create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. By default. which are listed on the menu. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. and View. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Edit.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . This creates a new project based on the default template. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. click (New). In addition. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. For example. you type the required key combination to perform the command. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. While working in the drawing area. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.

You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. a door type is specified. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. On the left side of the Options Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. When you select the Door tool.

You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. ■ The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. 9 In the Type Selector. For example. In the drawing area. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. when you add a door. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction .8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector.

■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. containing buttons grouped by function. click the tab in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. immediately below the Type Selector. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . 11 Click OK.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.

select Views (all). In the Project Browser. families. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and groups of your current project: ■ Right-click in the browser to add. delete. schedules. and groups. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and rename views.TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. reports. families. sheets. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

■ The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. click Wall. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 3D). windows). The browser is dockable. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. click Cancel. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . The cursor displays as a pencil. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. and group name. double-click its name. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. Do not click. family category (doors. walls. After creating a browser organization scheme. elevations. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. To open a view. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area.

Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. Revit MEP 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2009 Help. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. In this case. 20 Press TAB. in conjunction with tooltips. find a keyword on the Index tab." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. 18 On the Design Bar. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. In the status bar. click Modify to end the Wall command. The status bar also provides information. When you place the cursor over an element. regarding selected elements in a view. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. There are several tools that help you find information.In the bottom left corner of the window. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. You can use this tri-pane. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

press F1 for help. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. After you are familiar with these tasks. There are several ways to access zoom options.rvt. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Toolbar: From the toolbar. Click the Help button. For example. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 17 .In addition. click Training Files. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. press F1 for context-sensitive help. Tooltips: To see tooltips. In the following steps. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP In this exercise. Windows: From any window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. If no Help button displays. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click on the Standard toolbar. Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials.

The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. the view zooms out from the building model. In the drawing area. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. 5 On the View toolbar. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. this is referred to as a crossing selection.The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . When you release the mouse button. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 7 Click in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. 6 Click Zoom To Fit.

click Settings menu ➤ Options. on the View toolbar. As you move the mouse. NOTE As you zoom in and out.9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. and then using the Zoom tool again. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 10 To display SteeringWheels. and click the SteeringWheels tab. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. 13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. press ESC. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. and click Help. 15 To exit the wheel. . To define settings for SteeringWheels. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 19 . To modify or add snap increments. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. For more information about SteeringWheels. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. If you do not have a wheel mouse. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. moving the wheel to the desired location.

referred to as shape handles. as shown. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views.Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. 17 Type ZR. and double-click 2nd Flr. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. Small blue dots. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. expand Floor Plans. Cnst. and select the wall. display along the ends. When drawing or modifying a building model. and on the Tools toolbar. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. expand Views (all). bottoms. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Similar controls. These are the drag controls. called drag controls. to lengthen the wall. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. click (Move). 18 Click and drag the left control. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. for example. The table moves down. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 21 . After selecting the element to move. and click again to specify the ending position. click to specify the starting position. 24 Select the plant. you want to move the table closer to the wall. 23 Click next to the lower wall. In this case. and drag it on top of the table. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. such as Move and Copy. as shown.Some commands. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.

NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Press ESC twice. All changes you make to a project are tracked. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. In this example. click Lines. Move. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. On the Design Bar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Some commands. click Modify. click the Undo command. 26 On the Undo menu. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. or press CTRL+Z. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. such as the Lines command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the second item in the list. 29 To end the command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. and click again to end it. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Express Workshop 23 .

24 .

which is the physical representation of the system. connect it to existing air terminals. high pressure system. you add and connect the air handler. 25 . When you have finished these tutorials. Finally. Creating a Supply Air System In this lesson. and exhaust systems using these components. and to place and size ductwork. The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. The systems are used to perform calculations and analysis. you create a supply air system that consists of 2 low pressure. You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. creating the primary supply system. you place the variable air volume (VAV) box. and size the ductwork. In Revit MEP. To create Mechanical Supply Air 2. secondary supply air systems and a primary. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an MEP project. return. you will have a basic understanding of Revit MEP design and documentation tools.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that are integral to the most common MEP workflows. you can create supply. After air terminals and mechanical equipment are placed in a model. an HVAC system is a logical connection between air terminals and HVAC mechanical equipment.

you place a parallel. and click Mechanical. In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. At the beginning of this exercise. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Mechanical tab. fan-powered. you create the logical system shown above on the left.Creating a Secondary Supply Air System In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. You then define a logical connection between the VAV box and 4 existing air terminals. If necessary. the model contains one completed secondary supply air system. 2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. Display the Mechanical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. VAV box in the model. right-click the Design Bar. scroll until the folder is displayed. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Supply Air System. The Mechanical commands are displayed. click Training Files. creating a secondary supply system.

Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. To zoom in and out. you find the command at the far left of the screen. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. click Mechanical Equipment. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. roll the wheel. Add a VAV box 7 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In this tutorial. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region.In this tutorial. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 27 . when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. The entire model displays on the screen. The model zooms to the specified area. 4 Type ZR. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. you can enter ZE to zoom out. hold the wheel down and drag. To pan. Then.

Directly above the Design Bar.8 inch Inlet. 12 On the Design Bar. the Type Selector displays the mechanical equipment that is pre-loaded in the model. 11 Click to place the VAV box in the location shown. 10 Press SPACEBAR once to rotate the VAV box 90 degrees. 8 In the Type Selector. on the Options Bar. but do not click. click Modify to end the command. The cursor displays as the VAV box outline. select Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 3 . 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4.

After the system is created. indicating that it has been selected. You do not need to enter the units. 14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Verify that the PrimaryToSupplyRatio is 0. The air terminal turns red.13 Right-click the VAV box.Airflow. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 29 . 16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box. verify that SupplyAirFlow is set to 900 CFM. this value is automatically updated to reflect the supply airflow requirement. for Offset. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. Create the system 17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it. ■ 15 Click OK. you can enter 10 0 without units. 19 Move the cursor off the air terminal. or just 10. 18 Click to select the air terminal. This value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the Level 1 ceiling and the Level 2 floor.200000 (20%).) ■ Under Mechanical . and click Element Properties. enter 10' 0".

click (Select Equipment For System). move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right. The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system. Verify the elements of the system 26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created. 25 On the Design Bar. click (Edit System). 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the equipment supplying the system.20 While pressing CTRL. indicating that they are selected. select the 2 supply air terminals to the right. (Create Supply Air System). and the number of elements that make up the system. 22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. click Modify to end the command. the air terminals display in red. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected air terminals. click 23 On the Options Bar. The Options Bar displays system information such as the system name. 24 Select the VAV box you just placed. and click to select it. 27 On the Options bar. 21 While pressing CTRL. You have created a secondary supply air system that includes 4 air terminals and a VAV box.

the ductwork. You could change the name by overwriting it. the secondary supply air system shown below on the left. 30 Press TAB.rvt. select Network. 31 Move the cursor off the air terminal. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 31 . Specify the layout 1 Select an air terminal in the system you created. 3 On the Options Bar. you complete the secondary system by adding ductwork. for Solution Type. The sketch graphics highlight. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System The model now contains the logical connection for Mechanical Supply Air System 2. Do not click. click Finish. however. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Next. you leave it unchanged. In this tutorial. 2 On the Options Bar. you create the physical connection for the system. In this exercise. showing the logical connection between the components of the system. click (Layout Path). Verify the connections between the system elements 29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. 28 In the Supply Air : Mechanical Supply Air 2 dialog.Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2.

click solutions. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". ■ ■ ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. Configuring the layout path settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during the project. Verify that the Maximum Flex Duct Length is 2’ 0”. which is located to the far left of the drawing area. click Settings. click Finish Layout. Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex . for Duct Type. plumbing. 7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog.Round. 9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Specify the layout path settings 6 On the Options Bar. thus maintaining the consistency of these systems within the project. 8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. select Branch.A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and fire protection systems. The layout path settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 10 Click OK. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. select Main. for Duct Type. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. 11 On the Design Bar. (Show Next Solution) to display other suggested network 5 Click until the network solution shown below displays. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". piping.

Do not click. and enter . 15 Press TAB again to highlight the next level of connections. and a disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. fittings. Revit MEP supports 4 of the most common sizing methods: Friction. The branch to which the duct is connected highlights. select Friction. 16 Press TAB until the entire hierarchy of connected ducts. and Static Regain. Select Duct Fittings. click Sizing. Check the connectivity of the system You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key. 20 Click OK.08 in-wg/100ft. A disconnection will negatively impact calculations involving this system. and equipment is highlighted. Velocity. 22 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ Under Sizing Method. Select Ducts. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 33 . You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components. or click in an empty part of the drawing area. 14 Press TAB. 17 Click to select the highlighted system. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. click View menu ➤ Shading with Edges. Select Flex Ducts. 12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading. Equal Friction. 18 On the Options Bar. the system has not been created properly. and type SD. If the entire network does not highlight.Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect the components of the system. Size the duct system 21 On the Options Bar. Click Check None.

for Branch Sizing. The ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify to end the command. the adjusted SupplyAirFlow value of 625 CFM for the VAV reflects the supply airflow values calculated for the system. click (Element Properties). select Calculated Size Only.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.Airflow. 26 On the Options Bar. Next. 28 Click OK. select the segment of duct shown. 29 Press ESC to clear the selection. Under Constraints.■ ■ Verify that Only is selected. Verify the sizing 25 In the system you created. click (Element Properties). The ductwork is sized using the friction method at .Airflow. 33 Click OK.Airflow. 37 Click OK. you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. The Flow value of 300 CFM is the sum of the 2 air terminals. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 On the Options Bar. scroll to Mechanical . 34 Press ESC to clear the selection. 24 On the Design Bar. 30 Select the segment of duct shown. The Flow value of 150 CFM matches the required flow for the air terminal. 31 On the Options Bar. under Mechanical . 38 Press ESC to clear the selection. scroll to Mechanical . 23 Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box. click (Element Properties). 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 35 Select the VAV box in the system.

select 10' 0". click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems.Creating the Primary System Ductwork In this exercise. 3 To start the duct run. 5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV. select 12". select Round Duct : Taps. 2 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. ■ The cursor displays as a pencil. This specifies the duct diameter. in the location shown by the pencil. and click to place the second segment of ductwork and end the run. click Duct. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 35 . Create the primary air duct 1 On the Design Bar. For D:. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Click in the location shown to end the first segment of ductwork.rvt. For Offset. you create the main trunk line for the primary system and connect the 2 secondary systems.

select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. ■ ■ Click again to undo to first section of duct. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Type ZR. you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except for the end that connects to the air source. Add an end cap Before you size the ductwork for a system. click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct. and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line. 7 If your trunk line does not match the above illustration and you want to draw it again. 10 In the Type Selector. do the following: ■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar. This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct sizing. The ductwork and the proper fittings are automatically created. Draw the main trunk line again. click Duct Fitting.6 Press ESC twice to end the command. The model is zoomed to the end of the duct. as described above. 11 Place the cursor over the end of the duct to display an endpoint snap point. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

In addition to the graphic at the cursor. you use the Connect Into tool to automatically draw the duct. Connect one secondary system You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen. 18 In the Select Connector dialog. closing the right end of the duct run. 17 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the leftmost VAV. 20 Select the primary air duct. 13 Click to place the end cap. This connects the end cap to the ductwork.12 Press TAB until the point snap graphic shown below displays. click Modify to end the command. First. 15 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 37 . click 19 Click OK. select Connector 0 : Supply Air: Round : 8" Primary Air Connector. (Connect Into).

and click Draw Duct. and zoom in on the rightmost VAV box. 22 Select the VAV box. Connect the other secondary system Next. you manually draw the connecting duct. 21 Type ZR. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap connection. 23 Right-click the 8” inlet supply connector.

26 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Next. click Modify to end the command. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. The ductwork is created with a tap connection. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 39 .24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X) displays. you place an air handler and connect it to the main trunk line to complete the high pressure.rvt. 25 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. Do not click. Adding the Primary System Equipment In this exercise. Place the air handler 1 On the Design Bar. primary system. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add and connect the air handler for the primary system. click Mechanical Equipment. 3 Move the cursor to the location shown. select Air Handler : 10 ton.

7 On the Design Bar. 4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees. 6 Click to place the air handler. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 5 Move the air handler to the location shown. Create a vertical section of duct 8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it.The cursor displays as the air handler outline. click Modify to end the command. Do not click.

On the Options Bar. ■ Adding the Primary System Equipment | 41 . select 10' 0". 11 Right-click the connector. intake. and exhaust. click (Apply Current Offset). and click Draw Duct. The connectors on the front of the unit. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. are also visible. for the hydronic supply and return. Under Offset. 10 Move the cursor over the 24" x 24" supply connector.9 Click to select the air handler. The connectors on the top of the unit are displayed. These are the connectors for the air handler supply. select Rectangular Duct/Radius Elbows Tees. return.

A vertical section of duct is created. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 19 Move the cursor to the right. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. Attach a rectangular duct 17 Select the vertical duct you just created. and click. and click Draw Duct. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. past the end of the primary duct. The vertical section of duct you just created is visible. 18 Right-click the center point of the duct. 16 Close the 3D HVAC view. 13 Press ESC. 15 Double-click 3D HVAC. 14 In the Project Browser.

25 Select the air handler. click (Element Properties). (Select Equipment for System).20 Press ESC twice to end the command. 24 Press ESC. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 43 . Create the main system logical connection 21 While pressing CTRL. 26 On the Options Bar. select the leftmost VAV box. The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components. and then select the rightmost VAV box. 22 On the Options bar: ■ Click Click (Create Supply Air System). ■ 23 Select the air handler.

under Mechanical . 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . notice that the value for SupplyAirFlow is 32. 37 Press ESC to clear the selection.Airflow. This is the capacity of the air handler. Connect the ductwork 29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. click (Trim/Extend). 30 On the Options Bar. The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings. 31 Select the 24" x 24" rectangular supply duct by clicking a point on the duct between the air handler and the primary trunk line. 27 Click OK.815 CFM. under Mechanical .Airflow. View the system components 38 On the Design Bar.In the Element Properties dialog. 36 Click OK. 34 Select the air handler. click (Element Properties). 33 On the Design Bar. verify that (Trim/Extend to Corner) is selected. In the Element Properties dialog. 32 Select the primary 12" round duct. click Modify to end the command. 28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection. click System Browser. the value for SupplyAirFlow has been updated based upon the primary to supply ratio you specified in the element properties of the 2 VAV boxes.

expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views.rvt. 39 In the System Browser. expand Mechanical (3 systems). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you inspect part of the system you created. and the secondary system that was already in the model when you opened it. Inspecting and Color Coding the System In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Select a section of a secondary system. Inspecting and Color Coding the System | 45 . 40 Expand any Supply Air system to view its HVAC components.The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. close the System Browser. Next. You then add a legend to automatically color code the ductwork based on specific calculated values. and double-click 3D HVAC. click (System Inspect). the secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise. 41 When you are done. you inspect the system and color code the ductwork. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. Inspect the completed supply air system 1 In the Project Browser.

visual indication of a system’s air flow. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. The inspection tag describes the section that is being inspected. 5 Move the cursor over a section of the system. Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork 12 Select the legend. Place a legend and color code the ductwork Color coding the ductwork provides a quick. and pressure loss.Flow. under Color Scheme. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. click Inspect. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 Close the 3D HVAC view. the red arrows indicate critical flow path. The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow values. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Cancel Inspector. including flow. the other systems are displayed in half tone. The flow arrows indicate flow direction. static pressure.The selected system maintains its appearance. select Duct Color Fill . click Duct Color Scheme Legend.

lighting fixtures. (Delete) to delete the legend. Creating a Supply Air System. and the color scheme is removed from the legend. including power panels.13 On the Options Bar. and demand factors have been defined. the other circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on the other side of the room. distribution systems. . You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Revit MEP ensures that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. and a 480V panelboard that have already been placed in the model. junction boxes. power circuits. click 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. voltage definitions. Creating Electrical Systems In this lesson. and insulation type). under Schemes. Electrical settings have already been specified for the model. 16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window. Wiring types (including material. you create the physical connections between the components: the wiring. As you create circuits. The model already contains the electrical components you use to create the systems. Creating Electrical Systems | 47 . Creating Lighting Circuits In this exercise. and switches. click No. The color is removed from the ductwork. click 15 Click OK. 18 When prompted to save the model. select none. 14 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. One circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on one side of a room in the model. temperature rating. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. The legend remains selected. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. junction boxes. receptacles. You use the System Browser to view the created circuits. you create 2 lighting circuits using lighting fixtures. After creating the logical connections. You then automatically balance the electrical loads on a panelboard.

■ Open the i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. In this tutorial.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . right-click the Design Bar. The Electrical commands are displayed. you find the command at the far left of the screen.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. click Training Files. Display the Electrical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. scroll until the folder is displayed. If necessary. click the Electrical tab. and click Electrical. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar.

You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. you can enter ZE to zoom out. 4 Type ZR. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in.Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. Create a lighting circuit 7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model. Creating Lighting Circuits | 49 . The entire model displays on the screen. Then. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. In this tutorial. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. To pan. To zoom in and out. hold the wheel down and drag. The model zooms to the specified area. roll the wheel. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region.

8 Click to select the lighting fixture. indicating that it has been selected. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture. The lighting fixture turns red. 11 While pressing CTRL. they display in red. 9 Move the cursor off the lighting fixture. indicating that they are selected. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures. 10 While pressing CTRL. and click to select it. select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures.The lighting fixture highlights.

13 On the Options Bar. click 14 Select lighting panel LP-1. which is the logical connection between the elements. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. click (Create Power Circuit). Creating Lighting Circuits | 51 .12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. The red sketch graphics show the created circuit.

Create a second lighting circuit 16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. 17 When you release the mouse button. and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as shown.15 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . all the elements within the window are selected.

click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Click OK. The sketch graphics show the created circuit. 21 On the Options Bar.18 On the Options Bar. click (Create Power Circuit). Click Check None. 22 On the Options Bar. click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it. Select Lighting Fixtures. 20 While pressing CTRL. click 23 Select lighting panel LP-1. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). which is the logical connection between the elements. Creating Lighting Circuits | 53 . The lighting fixtures remain selected.

Do not click. Modify a circuit At this point. 26 Press TAB to display the circuit. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run. 24 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. The components include the 4 lighting fixtures and the junction box. you have created 2 lighting circuits. 25 Move the cursor over a lighting fixture in the leftmost circuit so that the lighting fixture highlights.

Verify the modified circuit 32 Highlight the junction box in the circuit and press TAB. 27 Click to select the highlighted circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits | 55 . 29 In the Power : 1 dialog. click Finish. 30 Select the junction box located among the lighting fixtures. 28 On the Options Bar. click (Edit Circuit). click (Add To Circuit).The circuit includes 4 lighting fixtures. 31 In the Power : 1 dialog.

only the logical connections between the elements exist. At this point. are created. click System Browser.The modified circuit is highlighted. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The circuits become visible when the physical connections. expand Electrical (7 Systems) ➤ Power ➤ LP-1. 33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. close the System Browser. 36 In the System Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. 38 When you are done. Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. the wiring. you assign switches to control the lighting fixtures. You can display the logical connections using the TAB key. and you can view the system components using the System Browser. The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. Display the electrical systems The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP. 34 Select lighting panel LP-1. 37 Expand the 2 circuits to view their electrical components. Next.

3 On the Options Bar. click 5 Select the switch as shown. and the 4 lighting fixtures on the right are controlled by another switch. (Select Switch). Creating Switch Systems | 57 . All elements in the drawing except the selected lighting fixture display in halftone.Creating Switch Systems In this exercise. 4 In the Switch System dialog.rvt. click (Create Switch System). you create switch systems to define switching behavior. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The sketch graphics show the only currently selected component of the system. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. click (Edit Switch System). The 4 lighting fixtures on the left of the room are controlled by one switch. 2 On the Options Bar. The switches have already been placed in the model. Create a switch system 1 Select the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the room.

the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated. click (Switch Properties). under Electrical . 11 In the Switch System (A) dialog. 10 Click OK. 7 One by one. Assign an identifier to the switch 8 In the Switch System dialog. click (Add to System). 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The switch system highlights. click Finish. 13 Press TAB. enter A. select the 3 remaining lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. for Switch ID. As you select each lighting fixture.The Options Bar displays the selected switch and the number of lighting fixtures currently selected (1). Verify the switch system 12 Move the cursor over the switch to highlight it. The identifier A is assigned to the switch for reference purposes.Lighting. 6 In the Switch System dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area.

25 In the Switch System (B) dialog. for Switch ID. enter B. (Select Switch). Click Check None. 16 On the Options Bar. The identifier B is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. 18 On the Options Bar. The selection is filtered. Creating Switch Systems | 59 . Click OK. 20 In the Switch System dialog. Select Lighting Fixtures.14 Move the cursor away from the switch system to remove the highlighting. Assign an identifier to the switch 22 In the Switch System dialog. click (Switch Properties). under Electrical .Lighting. The 4 lighting fixtures remain selected. click 17 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). click Finish. (Edit Switch System). Create a second switch system 15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click 21 Select the switch as shown. 24 Click OK. click (Create Switch System). click 19 On the Options Bar.

Then. you add a tag to each lighting fixture that identifies its type and the switch that controls it. Tagging Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.Verify the switch system 26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system. Tag the lighting fixtures 1 On the Design Bar. The lighting fixture is labeled with an automatically generated tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures.rvt. so each side of the room requires a different lighting fixture type. you define the lighting fixture types for the room. The lighting requirements for the left side of the room are different from the lighting requirements for the right side of the room. Next. 2 On the Options Bar. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . clear Leader. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems.

click OK. enter A. 5 Press ESC to end the command. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 10 In the Name dialog: ■ ■ Enter 2x4 3Lamp A. select (Element Properties). 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new lighting fixture type 6 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. 7 On the Options Bar. for Type Mark. The top part of the tag displays the identifier for the lighting fixture type. 12 Click OK.The bottom part of the tag displays the identifier (A) for the switch that controls the lighting fixture. Click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. The selected lighting fixtures are tagged. which you have not yet defined. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Tagging Lighting Fixtures | 61 . click Duplicate. under Identity Data. select the remaining 7 lighting fixtures in the room. 14 Press ESC to clear the selection. 4 One by one.

select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. 17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. 20 On the Options Bar. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and their tags are automatically updated. Change the type for the remaining lighting fixtures 19 While pressing CTRL. and the tag is updated. in the Type Selector.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp A) is automatically updated to display type mark A. 16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched. Change the type for some lighting fixtures 15 On the Tools toolbar. 18 Press ESC twice to end the command. The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type. select Troffer Corner Insert . For each lighting fixture.The top part of the tag for the lighting fixture with the new type (Troffer Corner Insert . the type is changed. click (Match Type).Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp B. The cursor displays as an eyedropper.

i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. Create a power circuit with wiring 1 While holding down CTRL.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. you create electrical circuits with wiring. You then connect the 2 circuits to create a multi-circuit home run. The lighting fixture tags are no longer displayed in the model. Creating Power Circuits In this exercise. 24 Clear Lighting Fixture Tags. One circuit connects 2 electrical receptacles in a small room. on the Annotation Categories tab. 23 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Next. 25 Click OK. you use electrical receptacles and a 208 volt panelboard that have already been placed in the model to create 2 electrical circuits with arc type wiring. Creating Power Circuits | 63 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. scroll to Lighting Fixture Tags. while the other connects the 8 receptacles in the adjoining large room.rvt. Turn off the tags 22 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select the 2 receptacles in the small room.

2 On the Options Bar. The sketch graphics show the logical created circuit. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Create Power Circuit). (Select a Panel for the Circuit). 3 On the Options Bar. click 4 Select power panel PP-1. The sketch graphics show the created circuit home run.

View conductor information 7 Type ZR. 8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown. 6 Press ESC to clear the selection. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. click as shown to create arc type wiring. Creating Power Circuits | 65 . which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command. You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner.5 In the drawing area near the created circuit.

neutral. 14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. The tick marks indicate the number of conductors (3) for the wire. select the receptacle as shown. under Electrical . click (Element Properties).Loads. 66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .9 Select the wire shown. 12 Click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. and ground). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. verify the number of conductors of each type (hot. 13 Press ESC to clear the selection. Create a second circuit with wiring 15 In the large room.

The sketch graphics show the circuit. 17 On the Options Bar. click 19 Select power panel PP-1. click (Create Power Circuit). The sketch graphics show the circuit and home run.16 While pressing CTRL. for a total of 8 receptacles. Creating Power Circuits | 67 . (Select a Panel for the Circuit). select the remaining receptacles in the large room. 18 On the Options Bar.

The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click as shown to create arc type wiring.20 In the drawing area near the created circuit. The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run.

click Wire. 25 On the Design Bar. Rewire a circuit 22 Select the home run wire for the small circuit. and zoom in on the region shown. The cursor displays as a pencil with arc type wiring. 24 Type ZR. and click Delete.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. 23 Right-click. Creating Power Circuits | 69 . The wire is deleted.

If the cursor is positioned as shown. 29 With the point snap graphic displayed. the displayed snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . but the point snap graphic is not displayed. click to place the end of the wire. 27 With the point snap graphic displayed. If the cursor is positioned as shown. In addition to the graphic in the drawing.26 Move the cursor to the location shown. click to place the end of the wire. The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. press TAB until the graphic displays. 28 Move the cursor to the location shown. press TAB until the graphic displays. but the point snap graphic is not displayed.

click Modify to end the command. The wires in the circuit have been automatically resized to accommodate the demand created by the new multi-circuit home run. 34 Highlight a wire in the small circuit as shown.The two circuits are automatically connected. View the multi-circuit home run 31 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Creating Power Circuits | 71 . click Tag ➤ By Category. select Leader. 33 On the Options Bar. Tag the wires 32 On the Design Bar. The 2 arrows on the large circuit home run indicate that it is now a multi-circuit home run. 30 On the Design Bar. creating a multi-circuit home run.

click (Panel Schedule Report). 37 Click to place the label. The Panel Schedule Report view opens.The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1). 35 Click to place the label. Next. 38 On the Design Bar. and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. View the panel schedule report 1 Select power panel PP-1. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area.rvt. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 2 On the Options Bar. The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1). PP-1 is highlighted to show that it is the currently displayed view. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. you view the panel schedule report for panelboard PP-1 and balance the electrical loads on this panel. scroll down as needed. click Modify to end the command. Balancing Electrical Loads In this exercise. 36 Highlight a wire in the large circuit as shown. 3 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you balance the electrical loads on panelboard PP-1.

under Panel Schedule. and the circuit structure is automatically reorganized. click Edit. A. 8 Close the Panel Schedule Report view. right-click PP-1. 6 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. B. (Edit Circuits on Panel).4 In the Project Browser. are shown. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. click The Edit Circuits dialog displays. The loads are balanced across each phase. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. for Appearance on Sheet. All the circuits connected to the panel are listed. and C. click Rebalance Loads. click OK. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. Balance the loads on the panel 9 Select power panel PP-1. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Properties. and the current loads on phases. Balancing Electrical Loads | 73 . 12 Click OK. click OK.

74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.The reorganized circuit structure is reflected in the wire labels. click No. 14 When prompted to save the model. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Electrical Systems.

Developing Your MEP Designs 75 .

76 .

As you create the mechanical system. you will understand the process. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you place spaces in the areas of the building model. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you perform a heating and cooling load analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2009. you plan the system by first placing spaces in the building. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. you create a plenum level and place various types of spaces. methodology. you can choose to save your work. you first carefully plan the system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. If the tutorial datasets are not present. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. as with any design project. you configure the linked architectural model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis. 77 . This system consists of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. Planning Mechanical Systems To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design.Mechanical Systems 3 In this tutorial. go to http://www. At the end of this tutorial. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. However. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spacial environment. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this lesson. Then. By following the recommended workflow. and contain information about the locations in which they are placed.autodesk. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this exercise. you design a mechanical system for an office building. First.

■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays. These components are defined in the architectural dataset. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. In this section. and after the linked model highlights. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate heating and cooling load analysis.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and click OK twice. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Configure the linked model The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. not in the MEP dataset. click Edit/New. select Room Bounding. 1 In the Project Browser. 78 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . The linked model is configured. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design bar. Open the i Spaces. expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). right-click. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 Mech. you add a level for plenums. click Modify.Mech. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and click Element Properties. Next. The elevation view opens. and double-click East . Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the building. make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding. This makes the architectural components (such as walls and floors) room-bounding so that they are recognized as boundaries for spaces. NOTE When working with a linked file. click the Training Files icon. and that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding.

enter an Offset of 1' 0" For Bottom. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. Under Identity Data. enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 7 is created. right-click Level 7. and its listed in the Project Browser under Mechanical ➤ ???. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan. and enter an Offset value of 0 0. 9 On the Options Bar. for Top. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK twice. verify that Level : Plenum is selected. and click Properties. click Level. Click Plan View Types. verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. click Yes. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and press ENTER.7 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. Under View Depth. ■ 10 Draw a plenum level 8' 6" above Level 1. In the View Range dialog. If asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Draw) is selected. 11 In the Project Browser. select Level Above (Level 2). 8 In the Type Selector. Scroll down to the Extents category. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. For Offset. for Level. and click Edit for View Range. For Cut plane. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Placing Spaces | 79 . do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click OK.

do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view. under Floor Plans. the 1 . select Level 1 Plenum.Mech view is not maximized or the elevation view was closed.The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. verify that New is selected. 15 Use the mouse scroll wheel. The Space box contains all unplaced spaces (spaces that were placed in unbounded areas). ■ ■ ■ ■ 19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. Place a space in an office area and in an open area 13 In the Project Browser. enter 0' 0" . For Upper Limit. click Space. Verify that Leader is cleared. Verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable. New indicates that a new space is being placed. This action specifies the vertical extent of the space. and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building. For Offset. The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs. 80 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 17 Verify that Space Tag is selected in the Type Selector. In the Space box. double-click 1 . and maximize the window.Mech. 14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view. 18 On the Options Bar.

Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown. You activate this visibility later in this exercise. TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area. Placing Spaces | 81 . you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. Later in the exercise. and click Zoom to Fit. 22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan. 21 With the Space tool open.20 Click to place the space. Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not activated. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. click to place a space as shown. and after the space snaps to the room-bounding elements.

Next. 25 Click the space tag name. you rename the 2 spaces. 82 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . A text box appears.23 Click Modify. 24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office.

and click in the drawing area. 27 Repeat this method. The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view. Color Fill displays space color fill when it is applied. You apply color fill to spaces in a later exercise. 28 With the view active. you activate spaces visibility. 30 Click OK. and select Color Fill. enter 101 in the text box. and rename the space in the open area.Enter Office. 29 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. Reference displays space reference lines (cross hairs). enter VG on the keyboard. and Reference. expand Spaces. Placing Spaces | 83 . Open 104. Interior. Next. 26 Double-click the space tag number. and press ENTER. The Interior option displays space shading.

Mech view active. Chain. 84 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of the radius wall as shown.Place a space in the entrance area You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated and cooled more often than the rest of the open space. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. you need to make this area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines. and (Line) are selected. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Draw). 33 On the Options Bar. To place a space in the entrance area. verify that 0' 0" is specified. For Offset. enter ZR. 32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. The entrance area is bound only by the radius wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. click Space Separation. and click Mechanical. 31 With the 1 .

If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space. and click to specify the end point of the third line segment. 39 Move the cursor to the left 4' 0" (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall). and press ENTER to specify the end point for the first line segment. The space separation line created a new fully-bounded area within the large open area. select and drag both of them. 36 Draw the line up. NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area. click Move to Space. The Draw tool remains open. click to specify the end point for the last line segment. If the space and space tag are inside the new area. 38 Draw the line down 32' 0".■ Verify that Radius is cleared. and type 4' 0" (notice the text entry box called a dimension listener that pops up). 34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall. and drag it to the larger open area. and after the end point snap displays. select the space (reference line) or the space tag. 35 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom out the view. Placing Spaces | 85 . and after the end point snap displays. Notice that the Open 104 space adjusted its boundaries so that it is not in the new area. click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment. 37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 32' 0". and click to specify the end point for the second line segment. 40 Press ESC twice to close the Draw tool.

NOTE Space separation lines are MEP-specific room-bounding lines that separate areas where a wall is not desired or not possible. Next. enter 0 0 for Offset. you place a space in the entrance area. after the space reference lines highlight. 86 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . select Level 1 Plenum for Upper Limit. For Name. verify that Leader is cleared. right-click and click Element Properties. verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box. spaces can be placed in them. 42 On the Options Bar. and verify that New is slected in the Space box. click Space. do the following: ■ ■ For Number. enter 121. under Identity Data. 43 Place a space in the entrance area. 44 Click Modify. enter Entrance. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. After the areas are separated. space separation lines are not recognized in Revit Architecture. 41 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 45 Place the cursor over the space. Although room separation lines are recognized in Revit MEP.

and select Interior and Reference. 57 Place the cursor in the plenum area. click Space. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. and enter 0 0 for Offset. Place a space in a plenum area 54 In the Project Browser.47 Click OK. Notice that the plenum space is not in the mechanical room or in the stairwell. The space is renamed Entrance 121. select Roof for Upper Limit. 49 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active. double-click Level 1 Plenum. The offset places the space 2 feet above the roof. Place a space in a chase area 48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room. 53 Rename the space. expand Spaces. select Level 2 for Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 87 . Roof is specified for the upper limit because the chase area spans multiple levels and ends at the roof level. 52 Press Esc. click Space. under Floor Plans. 51 Place a space in the chase area. 59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. and enter 2 0 for Offset. 50 On the Options Bar. Chase 118. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. 55 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 56 On the Options Bar. and click to place a space. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This is because the walls prevent space placement. The plenum space displays in the floor plan view. 60 Click OK.

that action removes the space from the Default zone. you modified the spaces visibility for the views. click System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Open the i Zones. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You used space separation lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area. enter Spaces Training for File name. click the Training Files icon. and verify the zones in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Creating Zones After spaces are placed in the building. 62 In the Save As dialog. However. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save. Otherwise. you can choose to save your work. you add spaces to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and double-click 1 . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. navigate to the folder of your choice. Finally. 88 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . In this exercise. NOTE After finishing each exercise. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and click Save. close the file. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines. 2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. When you add a space to a zone. you assign spaces to zones in the building. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise.61 If you want to save your work. In the next exercise.Mech to make it the active view.

The title bar displays the name of the new zone. and click View ➤ Zones. 6 On the Zone toolbar. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. you can add or remove a space from the zone. After a space is placed in an area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. you assign spaces to a zone. NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information. This removes the space from the Default zone. the Zone toolbar displays.NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. and a new zone is created. 7 In the drawing area. This is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. and modify the zone properties. place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space highlights. As you do this. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Using the Zone toolbar. You work with one zone until you click Finish. Assign a zone to spaces on the same level 5 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Next. click Zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 3 Right-click in Systems Browser. Creating Zones | 89 . The Zone tool opens.

To view the zone in the drawing area. 9 With the drawing area active. Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser.West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. click (Zone Properties). you need to activate the zone visibility which you do next. and click OK. expand HVAC Zones. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. 10 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. Next. and click OK. you rename the zone.West Offices. under Identity Data. In the System Browser. 11 With the Zone toolbar open. 12 On the Zone toolbar. add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone. enter VG. expand the new zone and notice that the Office 101 space is added to it and removed from the Default zone. for Name enter 1 . 90 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 14 Expand the 1 . The new zone displays.8 Click the space to add it to the zone.

20 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. expand HVAC Zones.Mech floor plan. add the following level 1 spaces to the zone: Open 104 Men’s Room 105 Mech/Elec 106 Ladies Room 107. 17 With the drawing area active. 23 On the Zone toolbar. you activate zones visibility for the view. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. 24 On the 1 .Mech to make it the active view. 25 With the Zone toolbar open.15 On the Zone toolbar. Assign a zone for spaces on different levels 16 In the Project Browser. 19 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan: 1 . 21 Zoom in on each floor plan. click Zone. 22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. and double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view. click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 27 On the Zone toolbar. click Finish. enter VG. 26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone. Next. verify that ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. Creating Zones | 91 .

for Name. select the reference line to the zone that you created. TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser. and click OK.Open Offices. 29 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Zone toolbar displays the name of the zone that you are editing. Next. However. 28 In either view. under Identity Data. click (Zone Properties). 30 On the Zone toolbar. The Zone tool opens. 31 In the Element Properties dialog.You need to rename the zone. click Edit Zone. enter 1 . 92 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . and click Properties. you edit the zone to rename it. you cannot open the Zone tool as this will create a new zone.

Conference Room 2 . 213 Conference 214 Offices 210.East Offices 2 . Spaces Offices 111. you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the building.North Offices 2 . Men’s Room 105. In this exercise. Men’s Room 205. proceed to the next step. Elec/Mech 206. Complete the zones for the building 33 For additional practice. The table below lists all spaces and the zones. 116.Entrance 1 . Elec/Mech 106. Office 209 Open 204. L1 Plenum 122 Offices 115. Ladies’ Room 107. 113 Entrance 121 Offices 108. 35 In the Save As dialog.West Offices Chases 34 If you want to save your work. use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in the building. 120 Zones 1 . 212 Lounge 208. 117 Offices 101.North Offices 1 . Ladies Room 207. 203 Chases 118. 211. All zones will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise.South Offices 1 .South Offices 2 . 32 On the Zone toolbar. Make certain that you verify the spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser If you prefer not to continue with this practice.Open Offices 1 .Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it. 112.Open Offices 2 . 202. click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and Creating Zones | 93 . and click Save. enter Zones Training for File name.The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. L2 Plenum 217 Offices 215. 109. 216 Offices 201. Otherwise. 103 Stairwells 114. 119.East Offices 1 . close the file. navigate to the folder of your choice. 110 Open 104. You activated zone visibility in the views. You can expand the 1 .West Offices Stairwells 2 . 102.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the i Zone Color Scheme. The zones are also listed in the System Browser. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. In the next exercise.Mech to make it the active view. and click to place the legend.in the System Browser. right-click the Design Bar. 94 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .Mech view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Type Selector. click Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. The color scheme is applied to the zones in the 1 . Verify that Schema 1 is selected for Color Scheme. 7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected. you apply a color scheme to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. you assign a color scheme to these zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Apply the color scheme 5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. and click Drafting. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Click OK. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using space schedules or accessing element properties. and double-click 1 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type. click the Training Files icon.

2 In the Element Properties dialog under Energy Analysis. and view the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. If you prefer not to continue with this practice. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. click File menu ➤ Save As. In the next exercise. In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. proceed to the next step. select Manchester. enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name. NH for City. For Postal Code. click Edit for Energy Data. Specify Project Settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Level 1 Plenum. 10 In the Save As dialog. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. space. Open the i Energy Analysis. 9 If you want to save your work. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 95 . All color schemes will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise.8 For additional practice. You then perform a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. you verify the building.Mech.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and view the loads report. and Level 2 Plenum floor plan views. and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog. ■ Click for Location. enter 03101. and zone information. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Office is specified for Building Type. use the method that you learned and add a color scheme for the zones on the 2 . and click Save.

Verify that Shading surfaces is selected. select Level 1. Next. Click OK twice. verify that Office is selected. 5 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that VAV . Verify that <Building> is specified for Building Construction. For Building Construction. NH is selected. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information.Single Duct is selected. Default Space Construction. click Heating and Cooling Loads. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Place and Location. Verify that New Construction is selected for Project Phase. After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool.Single Duct is specified for Building Service. For Ground Plane. verify that Manchester. (Building ■ ■ For Building Service (Default Space Service). you need to select this option. Then. A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the building. Verify building information 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit for Energy Data. Verify that 1' 0" is specified for Sliver Space Tolerance. and click OK. verify that <Building> is selected. and do the following: ■ ■ For Building Type. under Energy Analysis. Verify area and volume setting 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. if you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that VAV . Revit MEP stores this information as project information. You have verified the building information. 96 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems .

TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin. verify that Wireframe is selected (default setting). 9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space. and select Office 111. The space for Office 111 highlights in red. you isolate a space. pan. The analytical volume is bounded by the center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors. spin the model as shown. The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 97 .View a space 8 In the preview pane. 11 Expand the 1 . You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. 10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. 12 Click (Highlight).East Offices zone. Next. click the Spaces/Zones tab. and zoom the model to better view the space. 13 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.

The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. 18 Next. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces that normally would be obstructed by other spaces or by the architecture which would normally make it difficult to view.14 With Office 111 selected. floors. 17 Using the methods that you learned. and other room-bounding components. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. click Shading. the space information displays for the selected space. Below the list of spaces and zones. 15 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Verify space information 19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you verify space information. Next. highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its inner volume. select Office 111. 98 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Office 111. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. click (Isolate). 16 On the View Selector . you view the volume of the space differently. roofs.

This specified the number of people or the area per person for the space. This specifies the outdoor air per person. <Default> is specified for People Data. The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties dialog.East Offices.East Offices zone: ■ ■ <Building> is specified for Service Type. Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as space and zone properties. This zone information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the spaces in the zone. you verify the zone information. and clicking Element Properties. and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the 1 -East Offices zone.East Offices.00 °F : N/A for Heating Information. 70. ■ ■ IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. the zone information displays for the selected zone. respectively. (Isolate) tools to view the analytical 24 Click (Shading). This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and dehumidification set point. and air changes per hour. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 99 . right-clicking. click Wireframe. View other spaces and zones 27 Using the methods that you learned. 25 Click 1 . You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone information.00 °F : N/A for Cooling Information. Below the list of spaces and zones. 74. This zone contains 3 spaces. heating air temperature. N/A : N/A : N/A is specified for Outdoor Air Information. 1 .20 Under the list of spaces and zones. This specifies the cooling set point. Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data. 26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 . 23 As you did earlier.00 °F : 90. view other spaces and zones in the building model. outdoor air per area. and humidification set point. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. Next. verify the following space information: ■ <Building> is specified for Space Type and Construction Type. This specifies the heating set point.00 °F : 54. select 1 . You can also access the space and zone information by selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser. including Office 111. 22 On the Spaces/Zones tab. ■ ■ View a zone and zone information 21 On the View Selector . use the (Highlight) and volume of the spaces in the selected zone. and verify the space and zone information. This displays the analytical volume of the spaces in the selected zone.East Offices. cooling air temperature.

After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 100 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . This product is not included with Revit MEP. or import the IES model that has already been created. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. In the next lesson. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 28 On the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 31 In the Save As dialog. Revit MEP performs a heating and cooling loads analysis using the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool that was developed in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. and zone information. and click Save. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. that information does not display. Now that the project. and zone information has been verified. close the file. You must have IES <VE> installed. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. Various factors are analyzed including analytical and inner volumes of the spaces. 30 If you want to save your work. weather. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. space. Otherwise. space. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. click File menu ➤ Save. 29 Review the loads report. and zone information for the building model. or by pressing SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. For example. or zoom the view to see the selected space or zone. NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information. space. building. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. or make any changes to the model. click Calculate. space. or zone information. In this exercise.You may need to spin. the People Data option becomes blank. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. navigate to the folder of your choice. this report includes project. pan. if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data. you verified building. and a loads report displays. TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them. you can perform a heating and cooling loads analysis.

modify air terminal parameters. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes.Mechanical Systems:Air 4 Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. adding AC units. you will create supply air systems. After system creation. and then you validate your air system design. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Open the i Air Terminals.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Then. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. 101 . You can also select the 1 . you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. sizing ductwork. click the Training Files icon. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. Modify a ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. After completing the air systems lesson. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. In this lesson.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties). and double-click 1 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View Properties. As you place the air terminals. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create new views.

10 On the Options bar. do the following: ■ ■ Select Level 1 for Underlay. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. enter 0 for Offset. for the Level parameter. ■ ■ TIP When entering a value. 6 Click OK twice. 11 Click to place the supply air terminal in the upper left office as shown. and enter 8 7 for Offset. for the Cut plane parameter. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . separate the value with a space. for the Top parameter.Ceiling Mech is the active view. Under View Depth. under Graphics. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. You specify 8' 7" so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 8' 6") and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. click Air Terminal. Under Primary Range. 102 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .3 In the Element Properties dialog. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. and enter 8' 7" for Offset. 9 In the Type Selector. make sure that Place on Face is selected. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE The ceiling hosts the diffuser. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. select Supply Diffuser . 5 In the View Range dialog. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2". For example.

Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. TIP When you click Modify. the command in progress terminates. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. TIP To use the Move tool. and then click the midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. click to specify the move start point.use the arrow keys for fine movement control.12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile. You can also press Esc to accomplish this result. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the air terminal to the location shown. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 13 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. click Modify. and then click Modify. then select Multiple. you may have to move it to center it -. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. Since snaps are not available here. Placing Air Terminals | 103 . 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. 19 On the Options Bar. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. enter 300 CFM for Flow. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar.

select Exhaust Diffuser .Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. click Air Terminal. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). listening dimensions display to aid placement. 22 In the Type Selector. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. 104 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

25 Using the same placement method. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 250 CFM. and specify a 325 CFM airflow for each of them. 24 In the Type Selector. select Return Diffuser . place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of the restrooms. Placing Air Terminals | 105 .Before you copy the exhaust diffuser.Hosted: Workplane-based Return Diffuser.

TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. clear the UpArrow check box. right-click. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. 106 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click Modify.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. create the level 2 supply system.Ceiling Mech the active view. Optional: Create the level 2 air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. do the following for level 2: ■ Make 2 . 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1.Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. click on the Edit toolbar. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. Placing Air Terminals | 107 . After you place the supply air terminals. 30 Select the Office 101 air terminal. continue laying out the level 1 supply system.

click the Training Files icon. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. You will be using different views to design the systems. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. In this exercise. 33 If you want to save your work. navigate to the folder of your choice. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. modified the air terminal parameters. and 250 CFM airflow for the exhaust diffusers. In the next exercise. you create the air systems. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. More importantly. and learned a method for precise placement. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. specify the same view parameters as 1 . you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. In the next exercise. Specify 325 CFM airflow for the supply and return diffusers. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. In this exercise. 34 In the Save As dialog. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project.■ In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 108 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Verify that Formula is selected. click Schedule/Quantities. select Space. select Flow. 10 In the Calculated Value dialog. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added.■ Open the i Air System Schedules. 6 While pressing Ctrl. 4 Add Mark and System Type.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Select HVAC for Discipline. 8 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Number Space: Name Mark System Type Flow Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces. under Available fields. select Air Terminals. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Actual Calculated Airflow for Name. ■ ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ Under Category. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow Space: Name Space: Number 7 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. Create a calculated value parameter 9 Click Calculated Value. Select Air Flow for Type. select the field and click Remove. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 5 Under Select available fields from. Click OK. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 109 . and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared.

Verify that Grand totals is cleared. equals. ■ ■ The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule. A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. Click OK twice. On the Filter tab. and Count and totals.Space: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. and select Supply Air. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Space: Number for Sort by. The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). select System Type for Filter by. Enter -35 CFM and 35 CFM for Value. select Actual Calculated Airflow. in the Fields list. Organize the data 14 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Next. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 11 Click OK. The red values in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 CFM.■ Use the button on the right to enter Space: Actual Supply Airflow . This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 110 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click Conditional Format. Select Blank line. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field. 13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Select Not Between for Test. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. Verify that Ascending is selected. and Itemize every instance is selected. Use the schedule as a design tool 15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. Select Footer. Format the calculated value parameter 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. Click OK. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements.

24 Click on a diffuser to add a tag. and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. 18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views.This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules. speeds the design process. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 25 Modify the other supply air terminal Flow parameters for both floors so that the airflow design requirements are met. 23 On the Options bar. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. Tagging an Air Diffuser 21 Select Tag from the Mechanical tab on the Design bar. click Leader to clear this option. 16 In the Project Browser. the selected air terminal displays in red. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. 20 Delete 300 CFM enter 250. Optional: Modifying Other Parameters The drawing for the next exercise provides completed values. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. select the 300 CFM Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air terminal. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 111 . 22 Select By Category. The Actual Calculated Airflow value displays in white indicating that it now complies with the Office 101 airflow design requirements. 19 In the schedule. rather than one by one in a drawing. and press Tab. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. 17 Enter ZR. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. double-click 1 Mech to make it the active view. NOTE If a different project is also open.

Mech to make it the active view. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. 28 In the Save As dialog. you are changing the air terminal connector size. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save. In this exercise. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. 4 In the View Range dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. Under Primary Range. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. and double-click 1 . You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. 27 If you want to save your work. 2 Right-click in the drawing window.NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. under Extents. you create air systems. and then create the logical connection between the system components. for the Top parameter. all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in white. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. This is the power of BIM.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 112 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. However. After you modify the airflow parameters. and maximize the 1 . click the Training Files icon. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. In the next exercise. After creating the logical connection. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit for View Range. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. Unlike logical connections. Open the i Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. During this exercise.Mech floor plan view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. enter an Offset value of 10 0. 26 Close the schedule view. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. and click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building.

notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. As you assign diffusers to systems. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. This assignment occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.5 Click OK twice. right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. after you placed the diffusers. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. click System Browser. uncheck Air Terminal tags. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. 7 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides window.Mech view. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. If the System Browser does not respond. Explore the System Browser 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. So. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. click in the drawing area to make it active. air terminals. and click OK. enter ZR. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. Thus. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 113 . You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. 9 If the System Browser title says Zones. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. 10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. For now. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. if all system components are assigned. then press F9. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. 6 Type VG on the keyboard. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 11 With the view active. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system.

you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component.8 inch Inlet. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Select Equipment for System). 19 On the Options Bar. click to place the VAV box. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar.TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. and click Element Properties. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. 114 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Click OK.Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 . you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the right of the office door. Next. Note that the VAV will detect the downstream airflow when connected to diffusers. You created a system that includes the air terminal. click Mechanical Equipment. and press Esc twice. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 17 Select the Office 101 rectangular diffuser. you add the VAV to this system. 13 In the Type Selector. This VAV box services only Office 101 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. Modify VAV box parameters 15 Right-click the VAV box. If desired. select VAV Unit . and select the VAV box. click (Create Supply Air System). This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. 12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter 9 6 for Offset. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. ■ The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). do the following: ■ Under Constraints.

place the cursor over the Office 101 air terminal and press Tab. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. This display indicates that the new system is selected. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). They remain assign to their respective default systems. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. and click Select to select the system. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. The organization is from upstream. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. and cleared from the Options Bar. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Create the ductwork 20 With the new system selected. The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red.Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. select an air terminal that you added to the system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 115 . and select the system.

Enter 9' 6" for Offset.Round for Flex Duct Type. 24 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. Notice that Solutions is selected. click Finish Layout. 28 Click OK. select Main. 25 Under System Type: Supply Air. do the following: 22 ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. refer to Help. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. 26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. 27 Under System Type: Supply Air. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type.The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. 29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. click Settings. select Branch. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For more information. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Verify that 6' 0" is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. 23 On the Options Bar. 116 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and select solution 2. ■ Click (Next Solution). You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard.

On the View Control Bar. Change the geometry display 30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. For example. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. select Medium for Detail Level.The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. For example. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. select Coarse detail level for single line. and press Tab twice. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. thus it is not part of the system. as was the elbow itself. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 117 . and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. Check duct connectivity 31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct.

This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 34 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Verify that Only is selected. and enter . If the entire network does not highlight. 33 On the Options Bar. then you know that a disconnection exists. click Sizing. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Click OK. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and equipment. 118 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .08 in-wg/100ft. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. ■ The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . The first time you press Tab.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. fittings. Under Constraints. Size the duct 32 Place the cursor over the duct.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Rerouting usually correct this issue. under Sizing Method. and click to select them. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.

enter ZR. 41 In the left column of the System Browser. double-click the second VAV box listed. and click Element Properties.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. select VAV Unit . and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 37 Click in the drawing area. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 119 . 40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air.IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 35 With the VAV selected. the required airflow for the space and the airflow assigned to the diffusers. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the offices immediately below Office 101). right-click and select Element Properties. Note that the airflow is set to 250 CFM . 36 Click Cancel. click Mechanical Equipment.8 inch Inlet. 39 In the Type Selector. click to place the VAV box.

TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar.IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. 43 Select the Office 102 rectangular diffuser. 120 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click Select from the context menu. system equipment. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. 44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. right-click the component in the left column. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. right-click. and click OK. The component highlights in the drawing area. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. enter 9' 6" for Offset. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. This system includes the selected system component(s). 45 Click (Edit System). click Add To System. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. NOTE After you select a system component. under Constraints. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. 46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 47 Place the cursor over the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. If not. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. a new system is immediately created. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the active being edited.

click (Select Equipment). 50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar.48 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. On the Options Bar. 52 Select the VAV box. the number of elements has increased to 2. 49 Select the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 121 . 51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active.

The system displays in red. 53 On the Edit System toolbar. 54 Place your cursor over the Office 102 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. 55 Click to select the system.On the Options Bar. 122 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . If you leave the mouse stationary. click Finish.

and select solution 3. click Layout Path. 58 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. click Finish Layout.Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 56 On the Options Bar. 59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 123 . verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 57 On the Options Bar.

This was the reason for the warning message. You can either relocate the VAV box. or modify the duct manually. Add an endcap 60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102. If a warning occurs. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. 124 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 63 Move the cursor over the end of the main. you can review it and take action if necessary. IMPORTANT When creating layouts. So. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. and after the end point snap displays. 62 In the Type Selector. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool.The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. click to place the endcap. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. click Duct Fitting. 61 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct.

Size the duct 67 Place the cursor over the duct. Verify that Only is selected. under Sizing Method. Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. 65 With the VAV selected. 68 On the Options Bar. and enter . 69 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.08 in-wg/100ft. click Sizing. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 125 . Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Under Constraints. Click OK. right-click and select Element Properties. 66 Click Cancel. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction.Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. and click to select them. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 102 and 103 is sized using the Friction method at . Check duct connectivity 70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. air terminals. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. 126 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and press Tab twice. The VAV box.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 71 Right-click in the drawing area. 76 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. 72 In the 1 . sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space).8 inch Inlet. 75 In the Type Selector. 73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. click Mechanical Equipment. 74 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select VAV Unit.Next. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 127 .Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . However. and click to place the VAV box. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created.Mech view. click Zoom in Region from the context menu.

enter 9' 6" for Offset. select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV. under Constraints. 79 In the Element Properties dialog. The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled).77 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 78 Select the VAV. The new supply air system displays in red. 81 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). click (Create Air Supply System). 80 While pressing CTRL. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. and click again to deselect the VAV. You will add this later. 128 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

You have logically connected the air system components. and the red system display cleared. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. and select solution 1. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 129 . you create the ductwork to physically the system components. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 84 With the system selected. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Modify. 82 On the Options Bar. Click . click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. and press TAB once to highlight the system. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. ■ 86 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click to select the system. click (Select Equipment for System). Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Next. The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 83 Select the VAV to add it to the system.The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. Then. 85 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.

The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. 90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. notice that drag controls display. and then snap and move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV. click Finish Layout. After you select the branch. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. 130 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch. 88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV.87 In the drawing area. select the left section of the branch.

TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).The ductwork is created. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 91 Select the main duct. 94 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 131 . 96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. The new system component is now part of the same system. and (Edit) on the Options Bar. mechanical equipment. the Number of Elements increased to 5. The system components are now physically connected. A change has occurred in the air system design. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. 95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. Then. 92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. 93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. VAV. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. select a system component that is already part of a system. click Add to System. click Finish. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. Notice that on the Options Bar. Next. This number verifies the added diffuser.

select the flex duct and the transition on the diffuser. 100 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. you need to check that all the parts are connected. right-click and select Delete to remove the unwanted duct work. click Finish Layout. The new ductwork is created. ■ 102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Click . and working from the end of the main. and select solution 1. and press Tab twice. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar.97 While pressing CTRL. Check duct connectivity 103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. 99 Zoom out the view. 98 With the duct work selected. 101 On the Options Bar. Now that the duct work is in place. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 132 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

106 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Under Constraints. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. and enter . and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Verify that Only is selected. and click to select them. Size the duct 104 Place the cursor over the main duct. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 133 . 105 On the Options Bar.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. under Sizing Method. Click OK. click Sizing. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. The selection displays in red. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction.08 in-wg/100ft. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout.

If you receive errors. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. or reinsert duct fittings. So. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. see the note below. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 134 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. modify the layout. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. double-click 1 . You can either relocate the VAV box.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . 108 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. Optional: Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems (See the next exercise for a completed drawing. under Mechanical. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at 0. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. If you receive errors. Verify that all Other options are cleared. modify the duct manually.This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. Next. Reposition and rotate if necessary.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. Do not change the duct conversion settings. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. ■ ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct.) 107 In the Project Browser. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. see the note below. Select and modify a Network layout path solution.

you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. Size the duct using the Friction method at 0. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 135 . Next. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 10' 0" and the Detail Level to Medium. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. If you receive errors. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . Select and modify a Network layout path solution. Do not change the duct conversion settings.The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. For VAV airflow. Verify that all Other options are cleared. see the note above. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Optional: Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 109 Use the 2 . Reposition and rotate if necessary. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. 110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit .8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset.Mech mechanical floor plan view. specify the air terminal airflow. see the note above. If you receive errors. turn off Air Terminal tags.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save.Mech to make it the active view. navigate to the folder of your choice. checked duct connectivity. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 113 In the Save As dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. sized the ductwork. 112 If you want to save your work. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent.The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Open the i Using Views for Duct Validation. In the next exercise. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. and validated the systems in the System Browser. In this exercise. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. and double-click 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Although you already checked duct connectivity. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. and click Save. 136 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You also specified VAV airflow. After creating each system.

This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 137 . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. and the second click specifies the section tail. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 103. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. click the section. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. click Section. under Graphics. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. and click OK. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. enter ZR. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end point. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). select HVAC for Sub Discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Zoom to Fit. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area.Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. After you add the section. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click Section 1. The section relocates under HVAC. The selected section displays in red. 8 In the drawing area. The first click specifies the section head.

The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. select Medium for Detail Level. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. 138 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and 103. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 10 On the Design Bar. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The section head displays in blue. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be.You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles.

15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. select Section Box. 17 In the Project Browser. under Extents. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. A section box displays around the building model. 18 On the View Control Bar. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create.14 Continue to validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. Notice that in the 3D view. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. and click OK. and click View Properties. click Modify. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 139 .

click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the drawing area. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. 26 If you want to save your work. 22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. 24 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that you can verify that the Office 101. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 102. and 103 duct geometry is as you expected. 25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. 140 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view.

do the following. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 141 . you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. click the Training Files icon. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. and double-click 1 . and click Save. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZR. In the next exercise. click Duct. Open the i Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct.27 In the Save As dialog. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. and click to specify the start point. ■ ■ ■ Verify that 12" is selected for diameter (D:). You will create the primary systems in a later exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown. 5 On the Options Bar.Mech to make it the active view. select Round Duct : Taps. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. 4 In the Type Selector. navigate to the folder of your choice.

After placing the duct. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 8 Enter ZR. right-click on the air connection. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101. 142 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 9 Click on the VAV. and click Draw Duct. you can select individual segments and use the arrow keys to adjust location.7 Draw duct as shown in the following image.

10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. and click to specify the end point.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. 11 Draw the first duct segment 2' 0" to the right. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. TIP When drawing duct. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. 12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 8' 0" vertical second duct segment. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 143 . You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 8" VAV primary connector diameter. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. If you pause briefly. and click or press Enter to specify the end point. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. When drawing duct.

13 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. After you click to specify the end point. 144 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. 14 With the Draw tool open. the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the primary is complete.

You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. Check connectivity 19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. and after the connector snap displays. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. zoom the view to the right of the primary.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. 18 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. click to specify the start point. On the View Control Bar. 17 Connect the other three VAVs to the primary duct as shown. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 145 . 16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary.

and Angle is cleared. On the Options Bar. Finally. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. 146 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. 22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. Optional: Complete the level 1 primary duct (See next exercise for a completed drawing. You will size the primary in a later exercise.) 21 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. 20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. you will do that in a later exercise. Do not size the primary. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. specify a 9' 6" offset. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. Check connectivity.

Check connectivity. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and Angle is cleared.Mech to make it the active view. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. Optional: Draw the level 2 primary duct 23 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 147 . complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. specify a 9' 6" offset. 24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. On the Options Bar. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8".The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. You will size the primary in a later exercise. Do not size the primary. and double-click 2 .

you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes. However. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. 26 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views.Velocity.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. click the Training Files icon. Before sizing the primary.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. In this exercise. Finally. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. and click Save. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. 25 If you want to save your work. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. 148 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the i Duct Sizing . While drawing duct. In this exercise. but you have yet to size the primary. This determines the airflow direction.

and after the end point snap displays. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. and double-click 1 . click Duct Fitting. 4 In the Type Selector. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and 116. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click Mechanical.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. click to place the endcap.Mech to make it the active view. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 149 . right-click the Design Bar.

IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. ■ 150 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Verify that Only is selected. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Under Constraints. 9 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. The selected primary displays in red.Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. click Sizing. and enter 2500 FPM. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. Click OK. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. under Sizing Method. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.

or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. or reinsert duct fittings. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool.The sized left primary is shown below. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. and press TAB twice. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. You can either relocate the VAV box. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. Next. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 151 . it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. modify the duct manually. So. modify the layout.

the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run (See the next exercise for a completed dawing. The sized right primary is shown below. and double-click 2 . 152 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Mech to make it the active view.13 Using the process that you just learned. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 14 Using the method you have learned. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run.) 15 In the Project Browser. As in level 1. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run.

Like room color scheme.The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. In this exercise. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. Open the i Duct Color Scheme. you sized the primary duct for the building. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method.Velocity Training for File name. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. 20 In the Save As dialog.Mech. and click Save. and click Rename. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. 2 In the Project Browser. navigate to the folder of your choice. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. Then. enter 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Duct Sizing . right-click Copy of 1 . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 153 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.Mech. First. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Mech is created and becomes the active view. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. right-click 1 . 3 In the Rename View dialog.Mech Duct Classes for Name. 19 If you want to save your work.

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical. 5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 2000 FPM. In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter high velocity for the second row. In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

154 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Click OK.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. Using the same color scheme allows you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 155

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder. TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

156 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show. The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. 5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Split).

7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main about 11' 0" from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 157

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:
■ ■

Select Equal Friction, and enter 0.08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

158 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag. TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First, you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 159

sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select

(Inspect).

The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

160 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected to this system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment.

Inspecting Air Systems | 161

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units
In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units.

162 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view 1 Click the View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 2 Select Roof and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Roof. 4 Right-click Roof, and click Rename. 5 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK. 6 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Ignore the warning about the name changing. 7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK twice. 10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe. 11 Set the Detail Level to Medium. This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 13 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 14 In the Type Selector, select Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 163

15 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 16 Place the unit in the approximate location shown below.

17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. Create a new section view 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 20 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 203 VAV box, and click to specify the section start point.

21 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

164 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 24 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 25 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 26 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 27 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. You may need to adjust the top border to see all of the AC unit.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 165

29 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must relocate it.

30 Select the AC unit, and click

(Move) on the Edit toolbar.

31 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.

32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface, (1' 0" directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

166 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 1' 0" which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. Place the level 1 AC unit 33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):

Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 167

Completing the Supply Air Systems
In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make the view active. 2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it displays as shown below.

168 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 6 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 7 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 9 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 10 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection, the connector snap displays.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 169

11 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 12 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Enter 68" for W: (width), and 20" for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -2 6 for Offset, and press Tab.

■ ■

The -2' 6" offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 9' 6". Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 3' 6" and press Enter to specify the end point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 9' 6" from level 2, and then the duct continues horizontally for 3' 6".

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 14 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

170 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

16 Close the Roof Mech view. You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 17 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 18 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 171

19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining elbow. The selected items display in red. 21 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 23 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps. 24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter), select 9". Verify that Auto connect is selected. For Offset, verify that 9' 6" is specified.

25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the start point.

172 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

26 Move the cursor over the primary. 27 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 173 . click to specify the end point. and after the centerline snap displays. The left primary is connected to the AC unit. 28 Validate the geometry in the 3D view.

31 Select the right primary duct. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. 30 In the 2 .Next. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement.Mech view. 32 Drag the connector down and to the right. and place the cursor over the end connector. 174 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.

right-click and select Draw Duct.33 Select the right primary duct. draw a horizontal run and connect it to the midpoint snap of the riser . Completing the Supply Air Systems | 175 . 37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. 34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint. 36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool. 35 With the draw tool still active.

40 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. Add endcaps 39 In the 2 . The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected.You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. 176 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . However.Mech view. 41 In the Type Selector. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run.Mech view. you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. Check connectivity 38 In the 2 . zoom in on the duct riser. click Duct Fitting. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.

. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays.Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 177 . 42 Place your cursor over the top edge. click to add the endcap. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. 43 With the Duct Fitting tool open. 44 In the Type Selector.

verify the duct riser endcap. Verify endcap placement 47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. 178 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 46 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. click to add the endcap.45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. 49 Using the 2 views. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. 48 In the 3D view. and then validate its geometry.

Next. 52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan.50 Press Tab to check connectivity. click in the 2 . and then select Mechanical Equipment. 53 On the Options Bar. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2.Mech view to make it active. 51 With the 2 views tiled. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of Completing the Supply Air Systems | 179 . click Check None. and click OK. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. 54 In the Filter dialog. Create the high pressure supply air system. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit.

Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. 55 On the Options Bar.Mech view range. 180 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . all system components must be logically connected by a system.the current view are selected. 58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. and select the level 2 AC unit. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the selected VAV boxes to it. or even without ductwork. You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. 57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active. 56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. However. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. In this case.

65 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. The System Inspector tool opens. 63 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25.Mech drawing area to make the view active. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. 61 Expand Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . Completing the Supply Air Systems | 181 . This is the system that you just created. The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. click Inspect. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. diffuser. 60 In the System Browser.Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 25 system listing. Next. duct fitting. 69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. In the Unassigned folder. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. expand Mechanical. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. you inspect the system. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. 62 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 25 to view the VAV boxes. Supply Air. 67 Click a blank space in the 2 . and click Select. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. 66 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. and click Inspect. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed. 68 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct.Validate the primary supply air system 59 Press F9 to open the System Browser. Inspect the primary supply air system 64 In the System Browser. click Inspect. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25.

■ ■ This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view. 71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air system 72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. 9' 6". Next. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. Click the supply connector. move the cursor down. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 68" width.70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Specify the offset to -14' 6". and enter 3' 6". 182 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and a 20" height. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement.

and after the edge highlights.Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 183 .Mech view. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . release the mouse button. and tile it to the left of the 3D view. Watch for the centerline snap as shown. and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. Instead of drawing duct. select the left primary duct segment.Mech view (if open). open the 1 . ■ ■ Connect the primary to the AC. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser.Mech view. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. In the 1 .

Use Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. ■ In the 1 . and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. ■ ■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system.The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. ■ 184 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and remember to zoom the view.Mech view. and inspect the system with the System Inspector. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view. Validate the system using the System Browser.

Open the i Checking Air Systems. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. In this exercise. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. navigate to the folder of your choice. and quickly target those systems that need attention. In the next exercise. In this exercise. 73 If you want to save your work. As you view the warnings. you check the systems in your project. and for duct sizing. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and validated these logical connections. Revit MEP lists the system components Checking Air Systems | 185 . click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Using tiled windows. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 74 In the Save As dialog. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems.The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. click Check Duct Systems. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. and click Save. you need to validate them. click File menu ➤ Save.

This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. For example. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. However. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. 186 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . In the System Browser. the duct is now associated with that system. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. thus assigning the components to a system. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Then. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. as a tutorial exercise. After you assign the system components to a system. So. and for duct sizing. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems.that are associated with each warning. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement.

and click Save. In the next lesson. Depending on your air systems design. 10 If you want to save your work. 8 Right-click Supply Air. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. and click Select to view it and its assigned system components. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. You now confirm the systems that you created. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. click File menu ➤ Save. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. 9 Right-click a system. otherwise click Close. 6 Using the same methods.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. In this exercise. 11 In the Save As dialog. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. TIP If you have multiple views open. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. Checking Air Systems | 187 . 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder.The red lines represent the default logical connection. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. navigate to the folder of your choice. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder.

188 .

A new view called Copy of 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and inspecting the piping system. click the Training Files icon. circulator pump. First.Mech is created and becomes the active view. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. Then. a boiler. and the systems to logically connect the system components. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. pipes.Mech. you create hydronic piping systems. After completing the air systems lesson. Open the i Creating Piping Views. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. placing a circulator pump.Mechanical Systems: Piping 5 Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. In this lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. you create new views in which to design the piping system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 2 . You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. 189 .rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

For Bottom. 190 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. and click Rename. right-click Copy of 2 . This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7".Piping view selected in the Project Browser. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . Under View Depth. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. enter 2 .Piping for Name. scroll down to the Extents category. just separate the value with a space. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. Next. you change the view range. under Graphics. 8 Click OK twice. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and enter -11 6 for Offset.Mech. click view properties. and enter -11' 6" for Offset. For example. Enter -3 1 for Cut plane Offset. and click OK. 7 In the View Range dialog. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2".2 In the Project Browser. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. and click Edit for View Range. The 2 . you do not need to type measurement symbols. for Level. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. Also notice that 2 . TIP When entering a value.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems.

Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. 14 Under Categories. and enter VG. you can add and activate filters. 12 In the Filters dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. 15 Under Filter Rules. you need a define common filter criteria. select Mechanical Equipment. type name. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. and click OK. (New). Verify that none is selected for And. system type. Next. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. it will be best to create filters. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. Creating Piping Views | 191 . Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals.You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. Click Apply. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. you may want to select each component type separately. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. under Filters. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. click 13 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. however. the system filters are not used. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. Select VAV Unit . Depending on the filter criteria. click in the drawing area to make the view active. Considering this. However. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated.Parallel Fan Powered for the family name. So. 11 Click Edit/New. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. To do this. click the Filters tab. On the Filters tab. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. In this lesson. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. Create and define filters 9 In the 2 . Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. and verify that equals is selected. such as family name. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). However.Piping view. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. they will not filter all system elements needed. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. or even a description that you define. 10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog.

So. 19 Under Filter Rules. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. Remember to click Apply. 22 In the Type Selector.Hosted. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. 32 Click in the 2 . This is the same rule for using formulae. 23 On the Options Bar. 30 Click OK twice. under Identity Data. and select Air Terminal. you must spell both verbatim. Next. click in the Value column for Description. and verify that equals is selected. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. For Type. under Filters. . 192 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. and enter VG. you continue to create and define the filters. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 26 Click Apply. you can select it.Piping view to make it active. select Exhaust Diffuser Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). Because you already entered the description. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. 21 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. This action adds a description for all Exhaust Diffuser air terminals. select Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. return. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. you will not see the Description type parameter. return. Remember. and click OK twice. enter Air Terminal for Description. select Description for Filter by. click Air Terminal. and click Apply. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. This is because the selected supply. 29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers.16 In the Filters dialog. you create a description as the common filter criteria. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. 20 Enter Air Terminal for the description. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. Next. click Edit/New. and click OK. otherwise the filter will not work. 28 Under Identity Data. click (Properties). then the type parameters will not display. By selecting each air terminal type separately. select Supply Diffuser . 31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. Next. if differences exist in the selected elements. 18 Under Categories. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. click Air Terminals. click 17 Enter Air Terminals for Name.

verify that equals is selected.Duct Fittings. 40 Click OK twice. 39 Under Visibility. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. click the Filters tab. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. you filter duct fittings by system type. verify that equals is selected.33 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 35 Using the methods that you just learned. Filter by: Family Name. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. This is because you have not added them. Category: Flex Ducts. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. Filter by: System Type. click Add. verify that equals is selected. Filter by: Family Name. Creating Piping Views | 193 . verify that equals is selected. 34 On the Filters tab. So. Round Ducts. You used this duct to create the duct riser. clear all check boxes except for Mechanical . and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. you specify a family and a type name. click Edit/New. Filter by: Family Name. Category: Ducts. Category: Duct Fittings. Category: Ducts. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. verify that equals is selected. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. Flex Ducts . You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. Next. Category: Ducts. you activate the filters. 36 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. To filter multiple duct fitting types. Filter by: Family Name. verify that equals is selected. and click OK. you need a common filter criteria. Next.Supply and Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. you need to define the filter again.Round. you add and activate the filters. So. Next. And: Type Name. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. and select Round Duct for the family name. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. create the following new filters according to the specifications. verify that equals is selected. select all of the filters that you created. and enter Supply Air for system type name. If you did not click Apply. Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . Add and activate filters 37 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. And: Type Name. 38 In the Add Filters dialog.

Next. under Primary Range. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Mech is created and becomes the active view. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 48 Click OK twice.Mech. Unlike the 2 . you change the view range.Piping view.Piping view displays the new view settings. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. Create the level 1 piping view 41 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Graphics. 46 In the Element Properties dialog.All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 42 In the Project Browser. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer.Piping for Name. right-click Copy of 1 . right-click 1 . The 10 foot top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except 194 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . scroll down to the Extents category. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. The 1 . verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 10' 0" is specified for Top Offset. and click Edit for View Range. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. 47 In the View Range dialog.Mech. You now define the view properties. A new view called Copy of 1 . Next. 43 Enter 1 . 44 Right-click in the drawing area. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties.

under Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 52 Right-click in the drawing area. Next. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. and to create the level 1 piping system. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. 57 Under Visibility. You used this duct to create the duct riser. and click View Properties. you will be unable to view the duct riser. Creating Piping Views | 195 . right-click 3D. Create the 3D Piping view 49 In the Project Browser. 58 Click OK. If you turn off ducts visibility. you will want to validate the geometry. click Add. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. and click OK. As you create the pipe runs. select all of the filters that you created. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline.for the boiler pipe connection). 56 In the Add Filters dialog. clear Section Box to turn it off. 50 In the Project Browser. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. 55 On the Filters tab. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. and click OK. such as halftone architecture. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 59 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. click the Filters tab. ducts. 51 Enter 3D Piping for Name. under Extents. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab.

2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 196 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . You also created filters to display certain system components. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. navigate to the folder of your choice.60 Click OK. and click Piping. 5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. 6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. In this exercise. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click the Design Bar. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. you place the radiators and a boiler. 61 If you want to save your work. 4 In the Type Selector. click File menu ➤ Save. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. and click Save. select Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : 1" NPT. click Mechanical Equipment. 62 In the Save As dialog. Open the i Placing Radiators and Boiler.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 2 . you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. 1 In the Project Browser. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. In the next exercise.Piping to make it the active view.

except for the windows on the radius wall. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. 8 Click to place the radiator. To place the radiator precisely under the window. select it and use the arrow keys to move it into position. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 197 . and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown.7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. and notice that the connectors display.

and click OK. 14 Enter 4 for Flow. drag the section tail. Next. 12 On the Options Bar. under Mechanical Loads. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. If so. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator.Piping to make this the active view. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. 198 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . If parameters are blank. then these are different across the selected objects. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. 13 In the resulting dialog. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. and you do not want to include it. right-click a radiator. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. click (Element Properties). Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 4 GPM for all fin-tube radiators in the building. All level 2 radiators display in red. for Flow. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. you place the boiler. you modify the radiator flow rate. verify that 20 GPM is specified for all of the selected radiators. Next. and click Select All Instances. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. double-click 1 . If the same type of component exists on another level. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box.

Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler. and click to place the boiler approximately as shown. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Mechanical Equipment. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. watch the listening dimensions. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. and select Boiler : Standard from the Type Selector.16 Enter ZR. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 199 . you verify the boiler flow rate. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser.

TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. and double-click 2 . then press F9. In the next exercise. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. and then create the logical connection between these system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. analyses cannot be performed.Piping to make it the active view. right-click the boiler. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 If you want to save your work. you create the supply and return piping systems. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and click Element Properties. 22 Click OK. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. If the System Browser does not respond. During this exercise. click the Training Files icon. click System Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 200 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 21 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise. Open the i Creating Piping Systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. verify that 230 GPM is set for Max Flow. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. under Type Parameters. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. 1 In the Project Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. click File menu ➤ Save. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 24 In the Save As dialog. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. click in the drawing area to make it active. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. Unlike logical connections (systems). and click Save. After creating the logical connection.20 In the drawing area. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification.

6 On the Options Bar. Thus. 7 On the Options Bar. Notice that after you click . the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. after you placed the radiators and boiler. All level 2 radiators display in red. right-click. and select the boiler to assign Creating the Piping Systems | 201 . So. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. (Select Equipment for System). each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. and click Select All Instances. As you assign radiators to systems. if all system components are assigned. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. click it to the supply system.

the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. you create the return piping system. and select the system. all other components are unavailable. Notice that you can select only valid system components. This display indicates that the new system is selected. 202 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. Thus. Next. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. The organization is from upstream. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. press Tab. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. and click Select to select the system.

and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. Creating the Piping Systems | 203 . and select the boiler to assign TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. So. (Select Equipment for System). TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. and cleared from the Options Bar. right-click.Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. expand Piping. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. 11 The return system displays in red. These listings represent the systems that you just created. click it to the return system. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. 9 On the Options Bar. Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. 10 On the Options Bar. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. 13 Right-click each category.

or even without pipe being drawn. click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. 17 If you want to save your work. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. and double-click 2 . and click Save. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Select. click the Training Files icon.Piping to make it the active view. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. 1 In the Project Browser. in the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. In a later exercise. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. Open the i Creating Pipe Runs. 204 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components.15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. 18 In the Save As dialog. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators.

click Check None. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. 4 In the Filter dialog. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. you can place the cursor over a radiator. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Then. click Layout Path. Creating Pipe Runs | 205 .Notice that all components that are in the 2 . Notice that the radiators. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . 3 On the Options Bar. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. and then select Mechanical Equipment. The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.Piping view). the boiler.Piping view range highlight. 5 On the Options Bar.

It does not reference the architecture. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. 6 In the Select a System dialog. ■ Click (Next Solution). You will need to select a system to create the layout. select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK.IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). then the Select a System dialog will open. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. ■ 206 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The system displays in red. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. Enter 1 0 for Inset. verify that Solutions is selected. ■ Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. 7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. and select solution 4 of 4. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard.

do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. structural beams. 12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you now modify the layout path. duct. 11 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. 10 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. Next. click Settings. Later in this exercise. Enter -1' 3" for Offset. verify that Main is selected. Creating Pipe Runs | 207 . or architecture. For more information. Using this inset. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. and other obstacles. refer to Help.The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 10' 9" in the level 1 plenum space. Enter -1 3 for Offset. 13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. you create the supply pipe run 1 foot from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). 14 Click OK. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. select Branch.

You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. zoom the view. 17 Using the drag control. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout path. The layout path is located under the radiators. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. 16 In the drawing area. 208 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 15 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. A drag control displays. click Modify.

The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings Creating Pipe Runs | 209 . TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise.18 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. click Finish Layout. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 210 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Either relocate the system components. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. or offset elevations are incorrect. For example. Change the geometry display 20 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 201. and is not part of the system. select a different layout solution. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or manually modify the pipe. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created.are automatically inserted.

Creating Pipe Runs | 211 .Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. If a pipe is hidden by an object. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. This is caused by the hidden line setting. select Fine for Detail Level. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. 22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. 21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). To turn off hidden lines. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser.

The design requires 2 zones. On the View Control Bar. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 1 inch diameter. Additionally. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. Modify the pipe run 23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. 25 Press Delete to delete the selection. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. So. Medium for 2-line duct display. 24 Place the cursor over the pipe. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later.TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. select Coarse for single line display. and click to select them. Next. Instead of moving the pipe. 212 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog.

If the pipes had different diameters. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. 26 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. width. Next. 27 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). select 1" for D: (diameter). The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 1" indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter.Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. the logical connection (or system) is still intact. you modify the supply pipe run diameter. The diameter of the main and branches change to 1 inch. and click Modify on the Design Bar. the diameter Creating Pipe Runs | 213 . 30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. and click to select it.

the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. then you know that a disconnect exists. 214 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. press Tab 3 times. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment.would not display. The first time you press Tab. and equipment. Check connectivity 31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. fittings. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Next. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. If the entire network does not highlight. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. 32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights.

For pipe conversion settings. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Creating Pipe Runs | 215 . you can click to select them. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. and enter -1' 9" for both the main and branch offsets. Create the level 2 return pipe run 34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. you create the return pipe run. Enter 2' 0" for Inset. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. Next. This places the pipes at a 10' 3" elevation in the level 1 plenum space. 33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. This allows you to better see disconnects.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. Select Perimeter solution 4. Verify that 0" is specified for Slope.Piping view.

click File menu ➤ Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. 35 If you want to save your work. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Remember. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. 36 In the Save As dialog. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 1". and click Save. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs.■ In the Layout Path tool. 216 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The level 2 return pipe run is as shown.

1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. converted fittings. and double-click 2 . You checked connectivity. Resolving Pipe Interference | 217 . In the next exercise. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. Open the i Resolving Pipe Interference. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. corrected disconnects.In this exercise. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. In this exercise.Piping to make it the active view. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it.

click Zoom in Region.Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. and the second click specifies the section tail. 5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. The first click specifies the section head. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the section head location. click Section. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. After you add the section. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. 218 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell. Resolving Pipe Interference | 219 .A new section view named Section 3 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above.

You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. and click OK. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 3 view. under Graphics. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The section relocates under Piping. 220 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . right-click Section 3. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 11 On the View Control Bar.The section head and tail display. and click Properties. select Piping for Sub Discipline. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. 8 In the Project Browser. select Fine for Detail Level.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 221 . place the cursor over the top connector. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. Next. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. These connectors connect to the tee fittings. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting.Piping to make it the active view. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. and other aspects of your systems design. TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. mechanical equipment placement. and after the connectors display.

Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. you split the supply pipe segment. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. click (Split). and select the return pipe segment again. release the mouse button to reconnect it. and after the fitting end point snap displays. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. and click to split the pipe approximately as shown. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. 222 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to the area outside the stairwell as shown. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. 21 On the Edit toolbar. fittings. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting.18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. always connect to pipe segments. 19 Zoom out. If you split the pipe. Next. NOTE When modifying pipe. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap.

24 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. Resolving Pipe Interference | 223 . 26 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. Zoom out the view.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. and draw the pipe around the stairs. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. you convert a tee fitting. 25 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. Next. and press Delete to delete it.

29 Select the elbow and click on the upper plus (+) sign to convert the elbow to a tee. and then select the two adjacent pipes to add an elbow. 33 Zoom out the view. 32 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. and move the cursor to the left. right-click and select Delete. not vertical. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. and then click Modify. 31 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. orientation. On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 224 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and after the end point connector snap displays. The new tee has a horizontal. 30 Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. 28 Select Trim.27 Select the tee.

and after the connector snap displays. 35 Draw the pipe down. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. NOTE When drawing pipe. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. 36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. Resolving Pipe Interference | 225 . click to specify the segment end point. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment.34 Draw the pipe 12’ 0" to the left outside the stairwell.

The return pipe run is connected as shown. 226 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 39 Right-click the lower connector. 37 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. 38 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.

and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. the pipe diameter. The section displays in red. Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 42 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. 43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. If necessary. Resolving Pipe Interference | 227 . verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. However. The amount of movement that these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor.This activates the Draw tool. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. 41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. or width and height. 40 In the Type Selector.

Otherwise. select Fine for Detail Level. 44 Press ESC. click (Split). modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown.Piping to make it the active view. and split the supply pipe at 12' 0" from its left connector. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. you may get a false positive result.Although this section was used for air systems. 46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. 48 Zoom in on the stairwell. 51 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 5' 0" from its left connector. 52 Using the methods that you learned. 49 On the Edit toolbar. 50 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. 228 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. 47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . and double-click the section head to open the section view. watch the listening dimensions. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. 45 On the View Control Bar.

You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. 53 Again. Resolving Pipe Interference | 229 . using the methods that you learned. Remember to watch for connector snaps. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown.

You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. navigate to the folder of your choice. Draw. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool.54 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. Then. 55 If you want to save your work. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. diameter (or width and height). (2) Connect to a snap. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvtfile located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). In this exercise. Open the i Connecting Boiler. preferably a connector snap. the pipe type is also matched. click the Training Files icon. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. 230 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Remember that after you create pipe. 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. and offset are automatically specified. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. you used the Split. Using Create Similar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. the start point. Using these 2 methods. 56 In the Save As dialog.

7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. 3 In the Project Browser. Connecting the Boiler | 231 . You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows.Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Note that if this option is unavailable. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. You will design in the 2 . Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler.Piping to make it the active view. TIP When tiling 2 views. the active view is tiled to the left.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. the active view is the only open window. and double-click 2 .

and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 14 Move the cursor to the left. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 232 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click Pipe. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 7 feet from level 1. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. watch the listening dimensions. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. Enter -5 0 for Offset. and after the connector snap displays. 10 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at approximately 1' 6" from the boiler connection. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. 13 On the Options Bar.8 Zoom in on the boiler.

Remember to always use a semi-colon (. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). 15 Draw the pipe up to 3’ 0". and click to specify the end point. after listening dimensions display. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. enter -1 3 for Offset.) to separate snap increments. Connecting the Boiler | 233 . In a later exercise. 10' 9" from level 1. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. zoom the view and try again. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. 16 On the Options Bar. TIP When drawing pipe.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension.

21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. release the mouse button to connect to it.17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. The boiler supply connector pipe is created. 234 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click to specify the pipe segment end point. and after the connector snap displays.

The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Connecting the Boiler | 235 .

27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee. 26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active.Next. 24 With the windows tiled. 236 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run.

32 On the Options Bar. and the start point is automatically specified. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 29 Click in the 2 . right-click the right connector.28 In the 3D Piping view. select the tee to display the connectors. Verify that -5' 0" is specified for Offset. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. 30 Zoom in on the tee. and after listening dimensions display. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. Connecting the Boiler | 237 . enter 3 0 and press Enter. 34 Draw the pipe up. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view.Piping view to make it active. 33 Draw the pipe 2' 0" to the right and click to specify the segment end point. 31 In the Type Selector.

37 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. 38 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. 238 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 35 On the Options Bar. enter -1 3 for Offset. 36 With the Draw tool activated.This creates a 1 foot pipe segment. click to specify the end point. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. connect the right supply pipe run. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. In a later exercise.

Connecting the Boiler | 239 . 40 Validate the pipe geometry.The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 39 Check connectivity.

Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -11' -2" from level 2. click the specify the end point. 47 Draw the pipe to the left. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. 42 Select the boiler. and click Draw Pipe. 43 In the Type Selector. This places the return connection 10 inches above level 1. 45 Move the cursor up. verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter). and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. and that Auto Connect is selected. and right-click the return connector. and the 2 . you draw a 6 inch pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. 46 On the Options Bar. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 10' 3" from level 1. Next.Next. 44 On the Options Bar. Optional: Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 41 With the windows tiled. enter -1 9 for Offset. and enter 0 4 and press Enter. zoom in on the boiler. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.Piping the active view. 240 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

and after the connector snap displays. click to connect to the left return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 241 .48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run.

and click to specify the end point. 52 Select the tee fitting. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. 51 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. 49 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. and click Draw Pipe. 242 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 53 Draw the pipe 1' 0" to the right. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls.The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. right-click the right connector. 50 Zoom in on the boiler.

Connecting the Boiler | 243 .54 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. click to specify the end point.

The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run.55 Using the method that you learned. 244 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. 56 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe.

select the reference point where you want to align. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. and then you select the point to align. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. Connecting the Boiler | 245 .Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. 60 On the Tools toolbar. and after highlights. click to specify the alignment reference point. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. Next. 61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. in the 2 .Piping view. click (Align).58 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. First. If the Tools toolbar is not available. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. 59 With the 2 .

NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. and after the centerline highlights. click to specify the point to align. 62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. 246 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 247

The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also are parametrically adjusted. This situation results because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that you aligned.

65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

66 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

248 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 67 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 68 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 249

The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.50 FT/100ft. Select And, and enter 8 FPS for Velocity. Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

250 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 251

Placing Circulator Pumps
In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).

8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 0' 3" from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

252 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector, select In-line Circulator : Standard. 14 Place the cursor between the pipe openings and click to place the circulator pump. 15 Select the pump and click Rotate on the toolbar. 16 Flip the pump so that the motor is on the left. 17 Click Align on the toolbar and select the middle of the pipe above and the middle of the circulator connector. NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 253

18 TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys or the Move tool for precise placement. 19 Press ESC twice. 20 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 22 On the Options Bar, click .

You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -5 0 for Offset. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

254 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

24 Click OK. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC. 25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 27 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 255

28 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity. 29 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB. The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

256 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

31 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 32 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

33 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

34 Click the rotation control on the right.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 257

The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system 36 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser. You can also press F9. 37 In the System Browser, do the following:
■ ■

Expand the Unassigned folder. Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located

258 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. 38 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar. TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar.

39 On the Options Bar, click

(Edit System).

The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 259

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. 42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System. 43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler. System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click

(Inspect).

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

260 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 261

11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

262 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems
Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The piping system is logically and physically valid. However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

Checking Piping Systems | 263

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.

264 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The red lines represent the default logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views, otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the piping system assignments. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All. The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 265

and click Save. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. In this tutorial. 17 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. Design the system in the 1 . You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe 266 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. circulator pumps. specify 9' 9" for the supply and 9' 3" for the return pipe offset elevation. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. In this exercise.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. In the lesson. Finally. a boiler. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. 16 If you want to save your work. click File menu ➤ Save. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. Depending on your air systems design. and section views. and fin-tube radiators. the creation and modification methods remained the same. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. For pipe offset. 3D. 15 Using the methods that you learned. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. it is a valid system without problems. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. For additional practice.

parametrically modify those designs. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2009. Checking Piping Systems | 267 . Explore different system designs. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling).rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. The completed mechanical systems are included in the i Completed Mechanical Systems. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents.connections and creating logical systems.

268 .

go to http://www. However. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. In this lesson you specify electrical settings. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. If the tutorial datasets are not present. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems.rvt. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. After finishing each exercise. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Planning Electrical Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. 269 . and select i Office Building.Electrical Systems 6 In this tutorial. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. if the link is lost. and create schedules that you will need to design the electrical systems for your project. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder.autodesk. In this tutorial. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. However. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you can choose to save your work. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. click Reload From. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you learn to create electrical systems using a linked architectural model of a building project. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model.

Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. For example. distribution systems. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. power distribution systems. the Limit Offset. and in the right pane. wiring. and demand factors that you will use in your project. and demand factors that are applied in the design. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Electrical Views. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. wiring. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures.The electrical settings determine the voltages. then applying the appropriate template to each plan: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. Later. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. click Add (below the table). You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. Lighting. 3 Click Wiring Types. click the Training Files icon. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Insulation Max Size Value CU-THWN Copper 75 THWN 500 270 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .rvt. has been set to 10' 6" for the building used with these exercises. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. For this reason. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. expand Wiring. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. in the left pane. In the left pane of the Open dialog. power. and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views.

many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.00V 277.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 271 .00V 260. By specifying a range.00 V 480.00 V 208.00 V 220. For example.00 V 460. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. click Voltage Definitions. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.00 V 200. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 240 277 480 Value 120.00 V Minimum 110.00 V 490.00V 280.00 V 250.00 V 220.Parameter Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value 1.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00 V Maximum 130.00 V 240.

you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 120/240 Single 480/277 Wye Phase Three Single Three Configuration Wye None Wye Wires 4 3 4 L-L 208 240 480 L-G 120 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. click Distribution Systems. For example. even though this is physically impossible. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 8 In the right pane. 272 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

000VA. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. Power. HVAC. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. For example.NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. leave the default settings as shown here. For this exercise. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. Red. at any given time. 9 Click Demand Factors. 10 Click OK. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. this type of system (High. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. or Other systems in your project based on their load. You can specify one or more Demand Factors.000VA 3. More Than and Less Than values define the range for the associated Demand Factor: ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads.000VA.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA.000VA 10.000VA 10. Preparing the Electrical Plan | 273 . or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range.

16 In the Project Browser.rfa. and established the parameters for your wiring. 17 Using the same method. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard folder. and load Duplex Receptacle. and load the following families: ■ ■ Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. and demand factors. conference rooms. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the Troffer Corner Insert.rfa family. containing several switch types.Load component families 11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Imperial Library to the i families sub-folder. In this case the key style is the type of space and.rfa 18 Using the same method. has also been added under Lighting Device. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. in the Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. As an alternative. voltages. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. An Electrical Fixtures ➤ Duplex Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. and so on). and click Open. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. As you loaded each of the component families.rfa Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . you can load from the components from that location. A Lighting Devices ➤ Lighting Switches folder.480-208Y120 .480V MCB . expand Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Devices.rfa.Surface. expand Families. distribution systems. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of spaces (offices. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer folder. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Later. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. restrooms. selected components for your electrical systems. and load Dry Type Transformer . 12 In the Open dialog. 274 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . In this exercise.rfa. Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 274. 15 Click Open. 13 Select Lighting Switches.Surface. 14 Using the same method. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).NEMA Type 2.208V MLO .

click the Training Files icon. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. For Type. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. select Illuminance. Under Categories. and when the cross-hairs display. select Spaces. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lighting to make it the active view. you can look at the properties for one of the spaces. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type. To verify this. For Group. double-click 1 . 4 Click OK twice. select Electrical. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical . click Add. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. move the cursor over the office in the upper-left corner. select Electrical-Lighting. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 275 . For Discipline.Open the provided dataset. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Lighting Levels. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. Under Parameter Data.Lighting in the Space Element Properties dialog. click to select the space. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Required Lighting Level for Name.rvt. Select Instance. as described below.

your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical .7 On the Options Bar. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. 276 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. enter Lighting Levels. For Key Name. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the space component. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each space. there are many spaces in this project that have similar lighting requirements. However. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each space type. Click Schedule keys. In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Spaces for Category. 8 Click Cancel. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. click (Properties). 12 Click OK. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on space type. one for each type of space in the building. Click OK. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content. enter Space Lighting Requirements. click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule. ■ ■ ■ The Shedule Properties dialog displays.Lighting category.

under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. 16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan. click View Properties and. Assign space keys to the spaces in the project 15 In the Project Browser. according to the values in the following table: Space Type Private Office Open Office Main Entrance Lounge Restroom Conference Elec/Mech Stair/Circulation Required Lighting Level (fc) 30 45 45 25 30 35 20 20 When completed. 17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays. scroll down to the Identity Data category. and for Lighting Levels parameter. right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 277 . In the Project Browser.Enter a space type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of spaces in the project. and select Open Office. and click Element Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click . then right-click. the Key Schedule should looks like this: TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. You can change the sort keys for the schedule.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. double-click the 1 . in the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters.

Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Space Lighting Requirements key schedule. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 45 fc.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected spaces.Lighting. select multiple spaces of the same type (for example.Lighting 1 .Lighting category.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . 20 Click OK.19 Scroll up to the Electrical . then open 2 . continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in 1 .Lighting 1 . 21 Using the same method.Lighting 1 . While pressing Ctrl.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule. Office). Level 1 .Lighting 1 . then right-click one of the selections.Lighting Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Name Office 101 Office 102 Office 103 Open 104 Mens Room 105 Elec/Mech 106 Ladies Room 107 Office 108 Office 109 Office 110 Office 111 Office 112 Office 113 Stairwell 114 Office 115 Office 116 Office 117 Key Name Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 278 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting and apply Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog.Lighting 1 .

You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component.Lighting 2 .Lighting Number 121 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Name Main Entrance 121 Office 201 Office 202 Office 203 Open 204 Mens Room 205 Elec/Mech 206 Ladies Room 207 Lounge 208 Office 209 Office 210 Office 211 Office 212 Stairwell 213 Conference Room 214 Office 215 Office 216 Key Name Main Entrance Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Level 1 .Lighting 2 . Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values Defining Required Lighting Levels | 279 .Lighting 2 . and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.Lighting 2 . In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels on page 280. if required.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . For example.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you could create a key schedule named Space Variables.

rvt. enter Required Lighting. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the space components. click the Training Files icon. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. For Space Type. Open the provided dataset. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Color Scheme.according to space type. click Color Scheme Legend. select Required Lighting 10 Click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and click OK. and click 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. for Title. select Required Lighting Level. and place it in the drawing. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. 6 For Color. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Consequently. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. Under Title Text. click Edit/New. select Underline. double-click the 1 . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. and click Element Properties. select Spaces. as described below. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. In this exercise you will create a space color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Color Fills. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ (Duplicate). 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. select Show Title. Space color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. 14 Click OK twice. for Name. select Spaces for Category. 7 Click OK. selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Required Lighting Levels. 280 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

You can have more than one color scheme in the project. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for spaces.5 fc range specified in the schedule. Open the provided dataset. activate the color scheme as you did for 1 . This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. but only one per view. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. as described below. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you create a space lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 281 . or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise). 17 Using the same method. 18 You can save the open file if you wish. you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/.16 Make the 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each space against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.Lighting.Lighting floor plan the active view. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281.

enter Lighting Delta. Click OK. scroll down the Available fields list. For Type.Required Lighting Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Discipline. For Formula.rvt. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 2 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 282 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . select Illuminance. click the Training Files icon. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Schedule Lighting Requirements. select Spaces. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Space Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Verify that Ascending is selected.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Number. select Electrical. enter Average Estimated Illumination . double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane Create a new schedule parameter 4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Calculated Value. 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Create space lighting analysis schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. For Name. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

select 2 decimal places. verify that Fixed is selected. 17 Using the same method. under fields. 12 In the Color dialog. under Fields. specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 15 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 16 Click OK. For Value. For Rounding. 9 Click Conditional Format. and click Field Format. select Ceiling Reflectance. select Lighting Delta. select Lighting Delta. click the red color chip. enter -5 fc and +5 fc in the text boxes. under Basic colors. 18 Click OK. 13 Click OK twice. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Field. 14 On the Formatting tab.8 On the Formatting tab. 11 Click the Background Color chip. For Units. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 283 . select Not Between. For Test. 19 You can save the open file if you wish.

20 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column.5 fc range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Adding Lighting Fixtures. there is no required lighting level specified. Adding Lighting Fixtures In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces as 0. electrical equipment. and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. Designing the Electrical System In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices. However. the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each space’s lighting requirement. As you select and place lighting fixtures. In this exercise. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance. As a result. Place the initial lighting fixture 1 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces. and double-click Space Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. This is because the value is not within the +/. click the Training Files icon. as described below. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. Designing the Electrical System on page 284. Name. and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and these areas will not be lighted. Floor Reflectance. you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis. you will create power and lighting circuits. and make connections to electrical equipment. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project. Open the provided dataset. and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 284 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. Average Estimated Lighting. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Wall Reflectance. Only the Number.rvt. NOTE Right-click a heading. Once the equipment is in place. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column. and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise.

NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. 7 On the Windows menu. 11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan. 10 In the Type Selector. click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.Ceiling Elec view. click Lighting Fixture. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. double-click 1 . and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan.4 On the Windows menu. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 285 . and arrange the windows as shown. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 3 Lamp. and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 8 In the 1 .Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid. click Tile. click Close Hidden Windows. 9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. under Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans.

286 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture.12 Click Modify. and click when Intersection displays. and when Endpoint displays. click to specify the start point. 14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture. select it. and on the Toolbar. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture. click (Move).

(Copy). and on the toolbar. 18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point. Copy and place additional lighting fixtures 16 Select the lighting fixture. click 17 On the Options Bar.5 fc. and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of level 1. as shown.In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. the Lighting Delta for Office 101 is closer to the required +/. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 287 . This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. select Multiple.

TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing.Check the illumination levels against the Space Lighting Analysis schedule 19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 2Lamp. and 103 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 30 fc. you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each space with a 2-lamp fixture. 102. The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101. select one of the lighting fixtures in each space. Change lighting fixture type 20 In 1 . Point by point analysis is not currently supported. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. To adjust the illumination level downward.Ceiling Elec. 288 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and in the Type Selector. so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these spaces. press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. If you select a component inadvertently. but is still not within the +/.5 fc range.

only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. 22 Using the same method. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/. continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1 . Level 1 NOTE Lighting fixtures were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical spaces. When you are finished. and go on to the next exercise. placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset.Ceiling Elec and 2 .21 Again. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 289 . check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.Ceiling Elec views. Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range.5 fc range. and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range. Plenum and chase spaces will be blank. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset.

and click Unhide All Columns. 290 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . right-click one of the headings.Level 2 23 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.

click the Training Files icon. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. Placing Lighting Switches In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. click (none).Lighting. In this exercise.Lighting to make it the active view. you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans. 7 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. turn off the color scheme on level 2. Open the provided dataset. under Instance Parameters. 24 You can save the open file if you wish. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.rvt. 9 On the Options Bar. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of space 101. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing Lighting Switches | 291 . The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. click in the Value column for Color Scheme. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. as described below. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. click Device. Place switches in spaces 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place the switch. 5 Using the same method. 8 In the Type Selector. 4 Click OK twice. Turn off the color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Placing Lighting Switches on page 291. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Switches. double-click 1 . your Lighting Delta column for all of the spaces should be white. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and click Properties. under Schemes for the Spaces Category. 11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. right-click 1 .

and in the Type Selector. 292 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 . Level 1 13 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.Lighting view as shown. and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown. click Device. 14 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. select Lighting Switches : Three Way.

17 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. Placing Lighting Switches | 293 . and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. 16 In the Type Selector. select Lighting Switches : Four Way.15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. as shown.

22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown. 19 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector.Lighting to make it the active view. 20 In the Project Browser. 294 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 21 On the Design Bar. place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.18 In the open office area. click Device. double-click 2 . select Lighting Switches : Three Way.

Placing Lighting Switches | 295 .23 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown. and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. 24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. and go on to the next exercise. On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. click Device. as shown. placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 296 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Hide lighting components and specify view ranges 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Open the provided dataset. and double-click 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. as described below.Power to make it the active view. and click View Properties. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Receptacles. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Placing Power Receptacles In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. 1 In the Project Browser. Placing Power Receptacles on page 296. click the Training Files icon. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.Level 2 25 You can save the open file if you wish.rvt.

6 In the Element Properties dialog. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. click Edit.Power. including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas. 4 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. 5 Click OK. right-click 2 . 15 In the left side of the plan. edit the Visibility/Graphics Overrides for the view to hide lighting fixtures and lighting devices. 14 On the Options Bar. under Instance Properties. and click Properties. clear Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 7 In the View Range dialog. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. select Associated Level (Level 1). on the Model Categories tab. 10 Using the same method. 13 In the Type Selector. under Instance Parameters. enter 10' 0". for Top. Place wall-hosted receptacles 11 In the 1 . and for Offset. and specify the top of the view range as 10' 0". 9 In the Project Browser. scroll down and. Placing Power Receptacles | 297 . place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown. click Device. under Primary Range.3 In the Element Properties dialog. and edit the View Range to select Associated Level (Level 2). and click Edit. scroll down to View Range. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown. 12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.Power plan view. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 8 Click OK twice.

1-Power 298 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

Placing Power Receptacles | 299 . (Place on Work Plane). 20 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard.2-Power Place floor-hosted receptacles 17 In the Project Browser. The current level is selected by default. 21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office. 19 In the Type Selector. and place a receptacle on the floor as shown. click for Plane. click Device.Power. double-click 1 .

In the next steps. as shown. its connector is located below the level of the work plane. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right side of the Level 1 open office. (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work 25 On the Options Bar. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. you will flip the work plane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the work plane. click . 23 Select the receptacle and click plane (within the space). 26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point. 24 On the Toolbar. select Multiple.22 Click Modify. it is important that the connector be within the space to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. When placing a receptacle on a work plane. click (Copy). select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure. 27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles. 300 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures. as shown. and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles.

place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below. as shown. .28 Draw a pick box around the 2 floor-based receptacles. select Multiple 29 Using the previous procedure. as shown. and to the left of the men’s restroom. and click on the Options Bar. Placing Power Receptacles | 301 .

place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2 . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 303.Power view. TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 . then copy and paste them in the 2 . open 2 .Power floor receptacles. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close.Power. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.Power as shown.30 Using the same procedure. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. Select all 1 . click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.Power view. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 302 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

enter Power & Lighting Usage. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected. under Available Fields.In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. Open the provided dataset. click the Training Files icon. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components. 4 Click OK. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Usage Reports. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. With the introduction of local energy codes. select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area 6 Click OK. and select Spaces. you can refer to this report rather than having to measure spaces and count fixtures. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports | 303 . and for Name. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.rvt. because it is quite common in Revit MEP. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. scroll down the Category list. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as described below. the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A schedule is created similar to the one shown.

304 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). you need to create logical connections to define the topology. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).7 You can save the open file if you wish. Placing Electrical Equipment on page 304. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. and work toward the higher voltage. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment.

enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. click .Loads. select Electrical Equipment. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. under Electrical .Surface : 250A. for Distribution Sys. 6 On the Options Bar. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical space to the right of the panel as shown. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1 . Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Electrical Equipment. 9 Click OK. 3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. and click to place the panel as shown. as described below. under Instance Parameters.Open the provided dataset. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms. Add a transformer 10 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Electrical Equipment. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. Right-click the panel.Loads category. scroll down to the Electrical . select 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click Element Properties. click the Training Files icon. and for Panel Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Type Selector.Power. Placing Electrical Equipment | 305 . select 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : 45kVA. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. select 480/277 Wye.

Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. click . under Instance Parameters. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. enter L-1.Loads category. 20 Select the panel you just placed. for Distribution Sys. and on the Options Bar. For Panel Name. 21 On the Options Bar. 23 Click OK.Loads category. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. 16 Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. select 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click .12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. for Distribution Sys. select 480/277 Wye.Surface : 100A. Since this is a transformer. and on the Options Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select 120/208 Wye. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and place the panel to the right of the transformer. under Instance Parameters. scroll down to the Electrical . enter T1. scroll down to the Electrical . select Electrical Equipment. 19 Click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector. and for Panel Name. 306 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select panel L-2. and click 30 On the Options Bar. The temporary circuit displays Placing Electrical Equipment | 307 . 27 Click (Select Panel). and select panel H-2 for Panel. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. . because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. 28 On the Options Bar.Surface : 100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. click (Create Power Circuit).Surface : 250A named H-2 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: 45kVA named T2 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 26 On the Options Bar. . including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. 29 Select the transformer T2. In this case you are going to select something other than a panel. Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. click as shown.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer.

click 35 On the Option Bar. and click 39 Click . 38 On the Options Bar. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. and select the MDP panel. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. 308 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 37 Close the 2-Power view. . 34 In the 2-Power view. and on the Options Bar. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces side-by-side. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. . select the H-2 panel. select the L-1 panel.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. click .

and data systems. and click 41 On the Options Bar. and select the MDP panel. Open the provided dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Power Circuitry | 309 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. lighting. click the Training Files icon. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups).40 Select the T1 transformer. Creating Power Circuitry on page 309. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. . 42 You can save the open file if you wish. Circuits are used for power. as described below. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click .

The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. 310 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 1 In the Project Browser.Power to make it the active view. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. and double-click 1 .rvt. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office. 3 While pressing Ctrl. leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. load (180 VA). and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. select all the receptacles in the corner office. For now. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. and voltage (120 V).■ Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Power Circuitry. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 4 On the Options Bar. click .

and click to select the circuit again. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the office. 6 Click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed. click for this circuit. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance parameters. You use the Specify Circuit Information to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit.A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted. press Tab. and select panel L-1 as the panel NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. Creating Power Circuitry | 311 . and press Tab.

and ground wiring. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. respectively for this circuit. When editing a circuit. Wire Type and Rating. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. The editable parameters. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. neutral. 12 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. click (Edit Circuit). 1-#12. which are the wire sizes for the load. 1-#6. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. The currently specified values are 1-#12. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. click (Circuit Properties).10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. 1-#12. 1-#10. change the value from 20A to 50A. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. will be discussed in a later exercise. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. 312 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 11 On the Options Bar.

Loads category. click . and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. click Cancel. under Instance Parameters. scroll down to the Electrical . 26 Continue creating circuits. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. Creating Power Circuitry | 313 . 21 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. 16 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. 19 Close the warning message. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a space-by-space basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. click . for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. and try to select panel L-1. click . Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. 24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. and click Element Properties. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. creating power circuits.15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. click The circuit is created. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. and add it to panel L-1. and select panel L-1. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. . click . 22 Click OK. These will be connected in a later exercise. If you select L-1 in the drawing. and then select panel L-1. as previously described. 25 On the Options Bar.

314 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Adding wiring to a project is optional. and on the Options Bar.Power to make it the active view. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. In the Edit Circuits dialog. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. 29 Select the L-1 panel. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. create circuits in the 2 . Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. As you saw in the previous exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). 28 Double-click 1 . You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. Increase the number of circuits on panel L-2 to 18.27 Using the same procedures. 30 Click OK. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. These will be connected in a later exercise.Power view and assign them to panel L-2. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. Finally. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. you have assigned only 17. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 314.

in the Value column. select Associated Level. 4 In View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for View Range. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. 11 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. for Top. select Lighting. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 13 In the Filter dialog. enter -1' 0" For Bottom. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under View Properties.Open the provided dataset. select Electrical Plan . right-click 1 .Lighting to make it the active view. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 315 . Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. 2 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ For Show Type. and click OK. and for Offset. as shown. click the Training Files icon. select Electrical Lighting Plan. select Associated Level. and click OK. 10 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. under Names. Click 3 In the right pane. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit in the Value column. select <all>. and click Apply View Template. click (Filter). enter Electrical Lighting Plan. enter 3' 0" Under View Depth. Create lighting circuits 9 In the Project Browser.rvt. double-click 1 . as described below. and for Offset. 12 On the Options Bar. and in the New View Template dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Offset. Create an Electrical Lighting Plan template for Lighting Views 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 8 In the Apply View Template dialog. for Level. enter 3' 0" 5 Click OK.Lighting. For Names. 6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline. select Level Above.

14 On the Options Bar. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. 15 Close the message window and. 316 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). click .

Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 317 .17 On the Options Bar. click . move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. ceilings. In this step. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. When creating wires. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. Splined wiring is similar to arc. click (Filter). you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. click circuit. neutral. when you create wiring manually. and click the switch to select the switches. 20 On the Options Bar. as in this step. press Tab. 18 On the Options Bar. click . Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. but with an additional vertex. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the . Later. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. or floors. ground) in the wire run. click Check None. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. lighting fixtures. you created arc type wiring. you can specify splined wiring. In the next steps. and click OK. select Wires. 21 In the Filter dialog. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls.

26 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and assign each circuits to panel MDP. and click Element Properties. 25 In the Mech/Elec space. click . When this occurs. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. for Hot Conductors.Loads category. under Instance Parameters. and one ground conductor). enter 2 as the value. one neutral conductor. and click OK. and click OK. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. 28 Create permanent wiring for each circuit. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22. 27 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. 24 Using the same method. scroll down to the Electrical . under Instance Parameters.22 On the Options Bar. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 318 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . right-click the MDP panel. enter 2.

continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1 . then creating lighting circuits in 2 .Lighting. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. conference room. 32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. and assign each circuit to panel H-2. and click OK. 31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. Otherwise. scroll down to the Electrical . These will be connected in a later exercise. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise.29 For more practice. assign the circuit to panel H-2. and in the Element Properties dialog.Lighting view. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 319 . change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18.Loads category. and restrooms in the 2 . lounge. under Instance Parameters. 30 Right-click panel H-2.Lighting view.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the provided dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and panel information. you will create a space schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. but does not prevent you from doing so. assign lighting fixtures to switches.33 You can save the open file if you wish. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. fixtures. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. and double-click 1 .Lighting to make it the active view. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Switch Systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. as described below. click the Training Files icon. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and specify switch IDs for switches. 320 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires.rvt. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing.

6 On the Switch System toolbar. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar.2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). and on the Options Bar. press Tab. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. (Edit Switch System). TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system. After creating the switch system. click (Create Switch System). (Remove From System). click Multiple. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding switches). When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. and click to select everything in the system. click The Switch System toolbar is activated. 4 Click (Select Switch for System). Creating Switch Systems | 321 . you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. click (Filter) to select only the lighting fixtures. you can highlight one of the lighting fixtures. click Finish to confirm your selections. ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. select The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. 3 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. Then. 5 With the switch system still selected.

for Switch ID. click Finish. click .1st Floor. 11 On the Switch System toolbar. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 27 fixtures remaining in the system. enter Main Entrance . 15 Click 16 Click . (Switch Properties). and click OK.West. and select the switch on the wall 14 On the Switch System toolbar. enter North Stairwell . 8 On the Options Bar. under Instance Properties. under Instance Properties. and click OK.7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. (Select Switch). 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click (Switch Properties). The Switch ID is updated on the Options Bar. click outside the ladies’ restroom. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Switch ID. 322 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

26 On the Formatting tab. click . double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. click Finish. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. and restrooms in the 1 . Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. select Spaces. scroll down the Available fields list.18 On the Switch System toolbar. For Name. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 21 Using the same method. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. enter Space Number. and on the Options Bar. stairwell. Creating Switch Systems | 323 . Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. select Number from the Fields list.Lighting view. select Number. 20 Click . 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. Click OK. enter Switch Systems. and for Heading.

31 You can save the open file if you wish. continue creating switch systems in the 2 . and private offices. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities.Lighting view.2nd Floor for the switch ID. 30 For more practice. scroll down the Available fields list. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. Specify Open Area . 324 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system.28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. Create separate systems for the lounge. restrooms. Otherwise. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. conference room. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325.

move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. as described below. 2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan. 4 On the Options Bar. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Power to make it the active view. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. click the Training Files icon. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 325 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 1 . You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 5 Using the same method. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces along the left side of the plan. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. 3 In the corner office. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. 10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top office to specify the start point for the wire.6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper offices. click Wire. 326 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and delete both home runs. 8 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper offices are visible. 9 On the Options Bar.

11 Click in the open area near the door for the office to specify the second point for the wire. as shown. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint for the wire. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 327 .

and using the same method. your layout should look similar to the following: Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. if necessary. The direction will be corrected. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower offices. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the 328 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. When completed. when the wiring is completed.

14 Click Modify. 17 Right click the wire run. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 329 . drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. a shared neutral. In the previous steps. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower office as shown. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. and a shared safety ground). the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. and click. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. as the circuits in each office was added to the wiring run. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower office. select Insert Vertex.number of hot conductors.

Power views.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. Completed 1-Power 330 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Power and 2 . Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1 . 19 For additional practice. The wire behaves like a spline. adjusting its shape according to the vertex location.

1 In the Project Browser. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows.Power to make it the active view. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Checking Your Design. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Checking Your Design on page 331. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. and double-click 1 . as described below. Checking Your Design | 331 . Open the provided dataset. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. each with a load of 180VA. and click Select.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner office is visible. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. release the mouse button. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. 332 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. 5 Right-click a column heading. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. 8 In the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. 7 In the System Browser.

Checking Your Design | 333 . and expand Unassigned. collapse Power. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area.Lighting and 2 . 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. 10 Open the 1 .The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 .Lighting views and close any windows. and 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 1.Power.

Lighting view.Lighting view. 17 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. and on the Options Bar. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. click Finish. click 15 On the Options Bar. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. click create permanent wiring. 18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. click . 14 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. In the System Browser. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level.The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 . Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. to 334 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 13 In the 1 .Lighting view have not yet been connected. press Tab several times. and on the Options Bar. until the power circuit is previewed. click to select the circuit. clear Multiple. (Add to Circuit). 16 Click the title bar of the 2 .

enter 2. and in the Mechanical/Electrical space. and click OK. 19 In the 1 . select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. select Wires. click 27 On the Options Bar. click the title bar of the 2 . under Instance Parameters. In the System Browser. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. select panel L-1. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. 25 In the drawing area.Lighting view. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. Checking Your Design | 335 . 21 In the Filter dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Check None. 22 Click . press Tab. 26 On the Options Bar.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. for Hot Conductors. click . Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 24 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. .Lighting view.

336 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .28 Click to create permanent wiring.

create a power circuit for the 6 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view.29 Using the same method. Checking Your Design | 337 . 32 Click to view details of the warning. 31 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Check Circuits 30 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. 33 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. click Check Circuits.

Power. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. In the Project Browser. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits.This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 36 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 338 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Defining Circuit Loads on page 338. Open the provided dataset. In this exercise. Finally. 34 Close the Warning dialog. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and double-click 2 . as described below. 35 You can save the open file if you wish. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Circuit Loads.

3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click Rebalance Loads. and Phase C . while Phase A provides 4860 VA.4320 VA).4500 VA. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 5040 VA on Phase B.2 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. click . Examination of the loads on Phase A. 5 Click OK. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . select panel L-2. and Phase C provides 3780 VA. Defining Circuit Loads | 339 . Phase B 4860 VA. B.

12 Click OK. so no further changes are required. 340 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and for T1. 13 In the 1 . Therefore. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. . you may see different values for the loads. for panel H-2. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. and on the Options Bar.Power view. click 8 In the Project Browser. The remaining circuits feed the lighting circuits on Level 1. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. double-click 1 . the 3 circuits feed transformer T1. H-2 is a 100A panel. and on the Options Bar. click . 7 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. After the loads are balanced.6 Select panel H-2. 9 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. L-1 and MDP. enter 100A for the Trip value. select the T1 transformer. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. The 3 circuits that feed panel H-2 present a load of 18844 VA. and the T1 transformer. enter 40A for the Trip value. Therefore. 14 In the Type Selector. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. the H-2 panel. and present a load of 12960 VA. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. the actual load connected to it (12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 10 Select panel MDP.Power. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. you can use a 30kVA transformer. and present a load 6496 VA.

100.Power view. 1-#12. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 17 Click OK. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. Defining Circuit Loads | 341 . 22 Click OK. 1-#1. enter 40A for the Trip value. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. click . Verify/adjust wire sizes 15 Right-click panel L-1. 28 In the Type Selector. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. Notice that it changes to 3-#1. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. select the T2 transformer. 25 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and on the Options Bar. enter 100A for Rating. 19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. 23 In the Project Browser.00A. under Instance Parameters. 1-#8. 20 Under Electrical-Loads. 18 With panel L-1 selected. 24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. 21 Scroll down. select panel H-2. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. click (Circuit Properties). 27 In the 2 .00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. 1-#12. 26 Click OK.Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. and click Element Properties. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. for transformer T2. double-click 2 . scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.Power to make it the active view. on the Options Bar.

31 Click OK. under Electrical Loads. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. 342 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . double-click 1 . and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. 29 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. click . 36 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. Size the service entrance conductors 32 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 33 With the MDP panel selected. 34 Close the Warning. under Instance Parameters. click . 37 You can save the open file if you wish. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. 35 On the Options Bar.00A.Power to make it the active view. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 225A for the Rating parameter.

you will understand the process. go to http://www. However. By following this workflow. If the tutorial datasets are not present. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2009. and sanitary piping. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can choose to save your work. In this tutorial. hot and cold water piping.Plumbing Systems 7 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. click Reload From. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.rvt. 343 . However. including plumbing fixtures. After finishing each exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. if the link is lost. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you create the plumbing system. navigate to Training Files ➤ Architectural. methodology. At the end of this tutorial. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. and select i Office Building.autodesk. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. In this tutorial.

click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this lesson. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 344 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 3 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing.Floor Mounted.Wall Hung.rvt. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Water Closet . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems.Flush Valve . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Loading Plumbing Parts. planning is critical to a successful design.rfa 5 Click Open.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.rfa Urinal .

enter PVC Sanitary.PVC: Standard Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 345 . All of the loaded families. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Pipe Bend .Glued: Standard For Transition.PVC: Standard For Preferred Junction Type.PVC: Standard For Tap. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. and click Duplicate. 5 In the Rename dialog. select Pipe Bend . 12 You can save the open file if you wish.Flush Valve . select Pipe Transition . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select Pipe Short Tee . 4 In the Type Properties dialog.Glued. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 345.Sanitary . select Pipe Cross . click Rename. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: Water Closet . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.DWV .PVC . The selected component families are loaded into the project. and click OK.Glued.Floor Mounted and Urinal . for New.Wall Hung. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Right-click PVC 2. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures.rvt. click the Training Files icon.Sanitary . and click Properties. select None For Cross.rfa Pipe Reducing Short Tee . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Configuring Plumbing and Pipe Systems.6 In the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 2 Right-click PVC. are added under Families in the Project Browser. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. select Tee For Tee. 6 Under Mechanical. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them.rfa 11 Click Open. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon.

11 You can save the open file if you wish.PVC: Standard is selected For Preferred Junction Type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. then click Duplicate. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 3 sinks. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. enter PVC Sanitary Vent.PVC: Standard 7 Click Apply. 9 Under Mechanical. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. select Pipe Tee .PVC: Standard is selected For Union. and click OK. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close.PVC . verify that Pipe Bend . 8 In the Name dialog. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 346 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Adding Plumbing Fixtures. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. verify that Pipe Transition . verify that Tee is selected For Tee. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon.Vent . and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room.rvt. Finally. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. select None For Cross. You then modify the piping. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. verify that Pipe Cross . verify that Pipe Coupling . select Pipe Coupling .PVC: Standard is selected 10 Click OK to close the Type Properties dialog. In this lesson.PVC: Standard For Tap. you add 2 toilets. Add Plumbing Fixtures on page 346.Glued: Standard is selected For Transition. Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. for Name. ZR (Zoom Region).■ For Union. 3 urinals. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room.

5 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. 6 Click Modify. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 347 . 3 wall-mounted urinals. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and 3 sinks. a On the Design Bar. 4 Select Water Closet . click Plumbing Fixture. and click to place the toilet in the approximate location shown.The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. Position the first toilet 7 Position the toilet 6" from the upper wall.Flush Valve .6 gpf in the Type Selector. click Dimension. and 1' 6" from the right wall.Floor Mounted : Private 1.

d Move the cursor down. and press Enter. click 9 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click the value for the blue dimension to the right. enter 1' 6". Add a second toilet 8 Select the toilet. i Click Modify. g Select the toilet. The toilet is placed 6" from the upper wall of the toilet stall. c Click the face of the right wall. enter 0' 6". The toilet is placed 1' 6" from the right wall. e Using the same method. j Delete both dimension annotations. and Individual References is selected for Pick. Clear Constrain Verify that Copy is selected Clear Multiple 348 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Wall faces is selected for Prefer. verify that (Aligned) is selected. and press Enter. h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet. move the cursor over the center of the toilet. place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the back of the toilet.b On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Copy). f Click Modify. and click. and click to place the dimension annotation.

■ ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. 16 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 13 Select Urinal . 15 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. do the following. 11 Move the preview of the toilet 5' 0" to the left (into the left stall). click Dimension. and click to place the dimension annotation. and when the alignment snap displays and the preview is from the original toilet. and place 3 urinals approximately as shown. select Wall centerlines Verify that Individual References is selected for Pick 17 Click the centerline of the left wall.Wall Hung : 3/4 Flush Valve in the Type Selector. click to place the toilet as shown. and click. 18 Move the cursor down. 14 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. 19 Using the same method. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. Place wall-mounted urinals 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 349 . click Plumbing Fixture. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal.10 Click the center line of the toilet to establish a start point.

and click to place the dimensions annotation.Island . Place sinks 26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Plumbing Fixture. place the leftmost urinal 1' 8" from the left wall. 28 In the drawing area.Single : 18"x18". and enter 1' 8". and press Delete. 25 While pressing Ctrl. 350 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select Sink . select the counter top. then move the cursor up. 23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals.20 Working from left to right. 27 On the Options Bar click (Place on Face). and in the Type Selector. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. 22 Using the same method. (Equal Control) 24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. The urinal is placed 1' 8" from the wall of the toilet stall. 21 Select the rightmost urinal. click the centerline of each urinal in succession. click the value for the blue dimension. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. and click the blue above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall.

29 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. specify the distance between the center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 1' 10". 30 Place 3 sinks.Round : 5" Stainer .3" Drain. select Floor Drain . and click to place the floor drain. 31 Click Modify. as shown. 34 Using the same method specify the distance between the center line of the wall below the sinks and the center line of each sink. select Level : Level 2. 38 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 351 . 33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. and for Plane. click Plumbing Fixture. then equalize the space between sinks. and in the Type selector. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. specify the distance between the drain center line and the lower wall as 1' 6". click Dimension. 37 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane). approximately as shown. 32 On the Design Bar. Place the floor drain 36 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 35 Delete the dimension annotations.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. under Extents. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise.rvt. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 352. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. verify the view range settings: ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 6 On the View Control Bar. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Bottom Offset Under View Depth. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Level Offset 5 Click OK twice. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. and click View Properties. 352 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. and floor drain. scroll down to View Range. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. urinals. 4 In the View Range dialog. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Starting the Sanitary Piping System. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. specify Fine for Detail Level. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser.39 Click Modify. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Edit. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

16 Right-click in the system browser table heading. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset.The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. specify -1' 0" 13 Click OK. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. click (Create Sanitary System). 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. and click Main. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 9 In the right panel. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. 18 Zoom in on the men’s room. 19 On the Options Bar. and floor drain. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. The urinals. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. select Sanitary from the System Type list. click View ➤ Piping. specify -1' 0" 11 In the left panel. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Branch. Click Window ➤ System Browser. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. as shown. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 353 . click Mechanical Settings. toilets. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned.

The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. click Place Base. and on the Options Bar.20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the view. specify -4' 0" and for D. 25 Move the cursor over the chase. 22 Select one of the components in the newly created sanitary system. 27 On the Design Bar. and click to place the base approximately as shown. click (Layout Path). 24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. 28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. select 4". and a preview of the piping layout displays. for Offset. and on the Options Bar. 23 In the Select a System dialog. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. enter 1/8" for Slope. 26 On the Options Bar. click Sanitary 1. 21 Click (Thin Lines) on the toolbar. click Solutions. and click OK. 354 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

to view them. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 355 . and do the following: a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle of the chase above the urinals. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). click Modify. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. It’s easier if each segment can be moved to a snap. Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets.Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. 29 Select solution 1. Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout. and on the Design Bar. Customize the layout 30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout. as needed.

and drag the segment down into the chase. Snap the main in the middle of the chase. d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal. 31 Click Finish Layout.b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the rightmost toilet. select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. and click to align the branch to the main segment. NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment to the same location. This makes it easier to locate a snap. c Using the same method. 356 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

The second tab highlights the fixture. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 357 . as shown. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. checking for the proper connectivity. and orientation of fittings: a Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. The third tab should highlight the entire system. When a fitting is reversed. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. and check the slope control.32 Examine the piping that was automatically created. b Select each pipe segment in the system. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. slope. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation.

VG (Visibility/Graphics). expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and double-click 3D Plumbing. 35 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. click Show categories from all disciplines. 358 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 34 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. specify Fine for Detail Level.33 In the Project Browser. 37 On the View Control Bar. Enter the keyboard shortcut. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 36 Click OK.

3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet. 40 Proceed to the next exercise.38 You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 359 . 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Connecting Sink Drain Lines.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. adding the sinks in the men’s room. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 359 to continue creating the sanitary system. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

and click Draw Pipe. and on the Options Bar. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. enter 13. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. right-click the connector on the open leg. verify that 1/8" /12" is specified for the slope. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 360 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and press Enter. When you press the space bar.4 Select the tee. 7 Click Modify. 6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. press the Space Bar once.

and when the extension snap displays. 11 Select the fitting. click Pipe Fitting. and select Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard in the Type Selector. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click to place the fitting. and select Pipe Reducing Wye-DWV-Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. and press Enter.If you select the pipe. 9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 10 Click Modify. click the blue size control for the wye leg. click Pipe Fitting. enter 2". and when the snap displays. click to place the fitting. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 361 .

16 Select the wye fitting. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down to a point approximately even with the centerline of the wall below the sinks. 15 Using the method learned earlier. verify that Auto Connect is selected. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 362 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 17 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. right-click the connector on the open leg. 19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. and on the Options Bar. click to specify the end of the first segment of pipe. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. click to specify the end of the pipe. and when the end of the pipe is even with wall centerline. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and that 1/8" /12" is specified for slope.14 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. highlight the wye.

and in the Type Selector select Pipe Double Wye . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 363 . check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. press Space.DWV . 21 In the Project Browser. enter 0' 6" for Offset.20 On the Options Bar. 22 In the 3D view.Glued : Standard. In this case. the vertical pipe extends above the level of the floor. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. and click Modify. If necessary. click Apply. and click to place the fitting. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. 24 On the Plumbing tab. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. click Pipe Fitting. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described in the previous exercise.

click Section. specify 0' 8" for Offset. 31 On the View Control Bar. If necessary. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. place a section below the sinks as shown.Plumbing to make it the active view. and in the drawing area. 26 Click Modify. to orient the fitting. as 27 Select the double wye fitting. click shown above. 364 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . specify Fine. and on the Options Bar. specify Hidden Line. for Detail Level. For example. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 28 Double-click 2 . 30 Double-click the head of the section to open the section view. and for Model Graphics Style.The double wye is added to the vertical segment. VG (Visibility/Graphics) to hide architectural components that will interfere with selecting plumbing components. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. TIP When entering dimensions. 29 On the View tab Design Bar. in this step you can enter 0 8 (zero space eight) to specify 8". without having to enter ' and " symbols. 32 Enter the keyboard shortcut.

press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 0 6 and press Enter. draw a 1' pipe from the right leg of the double-wye. 37 Using the same method.33 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and clear the check from any category c Clear Show categories from all disciplines. draw the pipe up to the left. and click All again d Select any category. and on the Options Bar. do the following: a Click Show categories from all disciplines b Click All. it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting. for Offset. then clear the check from Lines e Click OK 34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. draw the pipe up. 38 Click the connector snap on the center leg. On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 36 Click Modify. 40 Select the double-wye fitting again. specify 0' 6". 39 Click Modify. click None. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. click Pipe. The fitting moves to the left when pipe is connected to the left leg. in line with the angle for the leg. then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg. 41 Click Modify. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 1 0 and press Enter. After adding the piping to the right and left leg. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 365 .

press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. and click Draw Pipe. 44 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. 49 In the Project Browser. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 366 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary. 43 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. 50 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. do the following: ■ ■ For Offset. and in the Type Selector. 48 Using the same method. and select the leftmost sink. 45 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. and click Apply Verify 1/8" /12" is specified for slope 46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.Plumbing. and click to specify the end of the pipe. connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. and on the Options Bar. 47 Click Modify.42 In the Project Browser. and double-click 2 . enter 1' 6". double-click 3D Plumbing.

select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 58 Click Modify. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. 59 Using the same method. 60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. While pressing Ctrl. (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through 55 Select solution 9 of 16. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 367 . 61 Select the double-wye. and select a proposed solution. click Routing Solutions. 52 Click Modify. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. 56 While pressing Ctrl. and on the Options Bar. 53 While pressing Ctrl. click Routing Solutions. 57 Select solution 7of 7. for D. for D. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). 54 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. and on the Options Bar. specify 2". You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. You use the proposed solutions. specify 1 1/2". select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size.

Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. 64 On the toolbar. 63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar. This is to be expected. and click Finish. for Slope. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. 368 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the segment where the slope could not be applied. enter 1/8" / 12". Close the warning. 65 On the Options Bar.

The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. and click Select. You can move fixtures by dragging. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. (Add to System). The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without changing the slope. then click Finish on the Edit System toolbar. 68 On the Options Bar. When zoomed in close. 67 In the System Browser. specify the slope for the piping to the left sink. If necessary. while pressing Ctrl. 72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. click Multiple. 70 In the drawing area. there is a smaller movement. select all 3 sinks. right-click Sanitary 1. you can specify the elevation of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe. specify the exact Offset. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 369 . click Finish on the Options Bar. click (Edit System). and under Instance Parameters. you can make minor adjustments to the system. click to select the reference end of the pipe. click 69 On the Edit System toolbar. the piping to the middle sink is already sloped. click Element Properties. and on the Options Bar. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to the zoom level. expand Sanitary. NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical. right-click the pipe.66 Using the same method. Then. modifying offset values. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Since the routing solution applied to the middle sink used the existing pipe (without adding a segment). Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains.

73 While pressing Ctrl.Glued : Standard. Now that the routing is completed. the entire system should be highlighted.Glued : Standard. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments.DWV . select Pipe Bend .DWV . and in the Type Selector. you can change these to the more commonly used Pipe Bend . Pipe Bend . 74 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye.Glued : Standard in the Type Selector. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.PVC : Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. and select Pipe Bend . highlight the leftmost sink.When the piping was created for the sink drains.) 370 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 75 Using the method learned earlier. (After the third tab.DWV .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. skip the next 2 steps. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 371 . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click File menu ➤ Save As. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. adjusting the sanitary stack. 77 You can save the open file if you wish. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 1 In the Project Browser. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Waste Stack Connection. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. otherwise. and select the horizontal pipe.rvt.76 If you want to save your work. 78 Click File menu ➤ Close. 79 Proceed to the next exercise. Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 371 to continue creating the sanitary system. click the Training Files icon. while maintaining the same angle.

and press Delete. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe).DWV .4 Select the elbow. and click to place the fitting.Glued : Standard. and on the Options Bar. 5 Select the vertical pipe segment. 7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. and select Pipe Reducing Wye . click Pipe Fitting. 372 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Add a reducing wye to the stack 6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify 6" for D (diameter). and when the Extension snap displays.

click the value for the 45 degree leg. 11 On the View tab on the Design Bar. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 10 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.8 Click Modify. and press Enter. enter 4 to change its size. The wye is added to the vertical segment. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 373 . If necessary. and click Modify. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward 9 Select the wye.Plumbing. double-click 2 . click Section. and click the sanitary piping. select the wye.

click Draw Pipe. press Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. and select the reducing wye fitting. 16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg. specify Fine. 374 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and when the center line for the main segment displays. for Detail Level. enter -2' 6" for Offset. 13 On the View Control Bar. click to specify the end of the pipe.12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. and press Enter. 14 Zoom in. 15 On the Options Bar.

The exact position of the riser is not critical in this application. However.DWV . 17 Click Modify. click Routing Solutions. and on the Options Bar. 20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. 19 On the Options Bar. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 375 . 18 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. 22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). and click Finish to create piping for that solution. when the location is critical. click Draw Pipe.Glued : Standard. select solution 3 of 3. The fitting moves toward the pipe being added after the pipe is drawn. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Bend . it will be necessary to move the piping after making the connection. 23 Click Modify. and in the Type Selector. 21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye.NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the reducing tee. then enter 4 0 and press Enter to add a 4' 0" vertical vent pipe. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. Refining the Urinal Lines on page 376 to continue creating the plumbing system.rvt. (If necessary. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Urinal Waste Lines. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. then down to connect with the sanitary main. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals.25 You can save the open file if you wish. click the Training Files icon.) 376 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. running it inside the wall.

and on the Options Bar. (Connect Into). 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. Refining the Urinal Lines | 377 . 9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal.3 Press Delete. enter 0' 6" and press Tab. and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost urinal displays. and click OK. click Connector 2 : Sanitary Round : 2" Out. 12 In the Select Connector dialog. press the Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click 13 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar. click to specify the end of the pipe. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector For D. 11 Select the leftmost urinal. starting at the level of the original pipe. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 0' 6". 6 On the Options Bar. click the connector snap. The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. specify 1/8" /12" 7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 8". and click to specify the end of the pipe. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. click the pipe above the urinal. for Offset. click Draw Pipe. 10 Click Modify. specify 2" Click (Auto Connect) ■ ■ For slope.

clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK. click (Filter Selection). and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. 15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 2" piping just added as shown.14 Using the same method. 17 On the Routing Modify toolbar. double-click 3D. Do not include the riser and fitting. 18 On the Options Bar. and click Finish. click The slope is applied to the selected piping. (Slope).Plumbing to make it the active view. connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main. 378 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 19 In the Project Browser. verify that 1/8" /12" for Slope. and on the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 16 In the Filter dialog.

In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. 21 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 4" segment) as shown. Refining the Urinal Lines | 379 . So. 22 On the Options Bar. specify 3" for D (diameter). double-click 2 .Resize pipes 20 In the Project Browser. However.Plumbing to make it the active view.

and when the extension snap displays. specify 3" for D (diameter).Glued : Standard is selected. Redefine fittings 28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. 31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North.Sanitary .Plumbing to make it the active view. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar.Add a cleanout 23 Select the pipe between the 3" elbow and the left urinal. 29 Select the 2" pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main. verify that Pipe Reducing Short Tee . 26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. and on the Options Bar. select 3". select Pipe PVC Plug : Standard. click Pipe Fitting. 30 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the pipe to the urinal again. 24 Select the elbow. double-click 3D. specify 2" for D. 25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. and in the Type Selector. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click to place the plug on the tee. then select 2". 32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. 380 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and on the Options Bar. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. for D. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees.

DVW . and select Pipe Bend . and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. Refining the Urinal Lines | 381 . 35 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.Glued : Standard. 34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow.

36 You can save the open file if you wish.rvt. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. If necessary. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described previously. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. 382 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click the Training Files icon. Adding Vents to the System on page 382 to continue creating the plumbing system. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping.

and in the Type Selector. 10 On the Filters tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. NOTE You must press Tab or move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. do the following: a Click Edit/New. and specify 14' for Offset. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Apply. Apply a filter to the vent piping 9 Enter the keyboard shortcut. click Pipe.4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. Adding Vents to the System | 383 . 8 Click Modify. VG (Visibility/Graphics). specify 2" for D (diameter). specify 0" for Rise/12". 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.

rename the filter Sanitary Vent. Vent piping throughout the plan appear as dashed green lines. click Section. click Rename. 12 On the View tab on the Design Bar. and in the Color dialog. f In the Add Filters dialog. 384 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click Add. h In the Line Graphics dialog. select (green). Create additional vents 11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 . and zoom in to view the urinals and toilets. specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent. and click OK.Plumbing to make it the active view. select Sanitary Vent. click the Lines column. and click Override. d Under the Filter Rules.b In the Filters dialog. and click OK. e In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. g For Sanitary Vent. and click OK. c Right-click Sanitary 1. and click OK. and place a section above the urinals and toilets as shown. i In the Line Graphics dialog. select IMPORT-DASHED (2) j Click OK twice. click the Color button. select Sanitary from the Filters list. for Pattern. and click (Duplicate).

and on the Options Bar. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. click to specify the end of the first pipe section. click to make the connection to the vent as shown. and for Model Graphics Style. 17 On the Options Bar. and enter the keyboard shortcut VG. specify Wireframe. 16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view. specify 2" for D (diameter). 18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. click Pipe. for Detail Level. then drag the preview to the right and when the center snap for the previously created vent displays. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Adding Vents to the System | 385 . verify the (Auto Connect) is selected. and enter 1/8" /12" for slope. 20 At a point above the toilets. clear unwanted architectural components from the view as described previously. 19 Begin drawing the vertical pipe. specify Fine. 15 On the View Control Bar.

386 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click to make the connection. f Click Modify. e If necessary. The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe. and click Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 Place another vent between the two rightmost urinals: a Click the midpoint of the pipe between the urinals. press Tab to display the connector. draw the pipe to the left to the open leg of the cross. 22 Right-click the new horizontal pipe. and click OK. for Offset.21 Click Modify. d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays. and click the + control to update the tee to a cross. specify 2". enter 9' 6" to specify the elevation for the reference end of the pipe. b Begin the vertical pipe. 24 Select the tee that was inserted when you connected the vents. under Instance Parameters. c For D.

Adding Vents to the System | 387 .26 Double-click 3D .Plumbing to make it the active view. 27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping. use the Flip control to make the adjustment.

and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe. and on the Options Bar. and specify 9' 6" for Offset. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. 31 Right-click the tee. 29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. specify 2" for D (diameter). click Draw Pipe. 33 Click Modify. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. then click Apply. 30 While pressing Ctrl. move the cursor into the drawing area. 388 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 32 On the Options Bar. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks.Add a vent to the sinks 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. specify 2" for D (diameter).

click 39 Enter 1/8" /12" for slope. 36 On the Options Bar specify 0" /12" for slope. right-click the connector at the open end. and click Finish. 35 Select the vent.34 Zoom out to view the vents from the toilets and urinals and the new vent from the sinks. (Slope). and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. click Draw Pipe. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. and on the Routing Modify toolbar. Adding Vents to the System | 389 . 38 Select the horizontal vent pipe. 37 Drag the pipe preview. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint.

41 You can save the open file if you wish. 4 In the Rename dialog. right-click Standard. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. for New. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 390 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. 42 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click OK. Create the Cold Water System on page 390 to continue creating the plumbing system.rvt. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. click Properties. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Rename. and click Duplicate. enter Cold Water.40 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 2 Right-click Standard 1. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Cold Water Piping.

5 In the Type Properties dialog. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). and click OK twice. specify Pipe Transition : Standard For Union. specify Pipe Straight Coupling: Standard 6 Click Apply. 14 Click OK. click Branch. 12 In the table. The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. for Name. specify None For Cross. and in the right pane. 9 In the table. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. click Main. 13 In the left panel. click Check None. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. then select Plumbing Fixtures. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list.Plumbing to make it the active view. 11 In the left pane. 20 While pressing Shift. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click Main. in the right pane. click Mechanical Settings. specify Pipe Cross: Standard For Transition. 19 In the Filter dialog. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. and click OK. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. which places the piping above the ceiling. and in the right pane. and avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. 16 Press F9 to open the System Browser. and double-click 2 . click Branch. then click Duplicate. click View ➤ Piping. You now have the cold water piping at 9' 3" and the hot water piping at 9' 0". 10 In the left pane. Create the Cold Water System | 391 . and in the Name dialog. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. specify Pipe Elbow : Standard For Preferred Junction Type. Create the cold water system 15 In the Project Browser. enter Hot Water. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. 17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. specify Tee For Tee. specify Pipe Tee: Standard For Tap. and on the Options Bar click (Filter Selection). select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. 21 On the Options Bar. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click the floor drain. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. in the right pane.

31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. 24 On the Option Bar. click Pipe. 392 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 32 Select the middle sink in the view. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. and click OK. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. specify 2' 6" for Offset. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. click OK. and in the Type Selector. 23 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Pipe. click (Connect Into). 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 34 Zoom in on the area between the middle and rightmost sink. and click to specify the end the segment. and click to end the run as shown. click Show categories from all disciplines. 35 On the Plumbing tab. 33 In the Select Connector dialog. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and on the Options Bar. Create piping for the cold water system 22 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. 30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. clear Casework. 26 On the Options Bar. Piping is added to connect the sink to the cold water system. specify 0" /12" for Slope.The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. 29 Click Modify. select the domestic cold water connector. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink.

click to specify the end of the pipe. and click Apply. and click to end that segment. 42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. 40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. select the cold water pipe. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. specify 9' 3" for Offset. 37 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. press Tab to avoid connecting to the sanitary piping. Create the Cold Water System | 393 . press Tab. just above the wall.36 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the sinks. 39 Click Modify.) 41 On the Plumbing tab. (If necessary. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. drag the preview into the center of the wall behind the sinks. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click Pipe. specify 1' 2" for Offset. click the snap on the cold water pipe. 44 On the Options Bar. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. 38 On the Options Bar. 43 Drag the preview to the left.

and when the center line for the left toilet displays. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 46 In the Project Browser. 49 Select the elbow behind the toilet.Plumbing. click to specify the endpoint as shown. double-click 3D. 52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle. 51 Select the tee. 50 On the Plumbing tab. 47 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. click Draw Pipe. and click the + control to change it to a tee. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 394 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). click Pipe. select the rightmost toilet.45 Click Modify. right-click the open connector. and then click the vertical cold water pipe.

53 Click Modify. . Create the Cold Water System | 395 . connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. 55 Select the rightmost urinal. . and click the vertical cold water Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 54 Select the leftmost toilet. and on the Options Bar click water pipe that you added to the tee. and on the Options Bar click pipe. 56 Use the same method. and click the horizontal cold Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.

All of the cold water piping is in place. and the horizontal segment to the sinks. The final steps in this exercise adjust the size of several sections of the piping. 58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. the tee. 396 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing view as shown. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D . as shown.

60 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. Create the Cold Water System | 397 . but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). 63 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink).59 On the Options Bar. specify 2" for D (diameter). specify 1 1/2" for D (diameter). as shown. 61 On the Options Bar. feeding the toilets and urinals (including the tees. 62 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks.

Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Hot Water Piping. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater.Plumbing.rvt. 398 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 68 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. specify 3/4" for D (diameter). NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. double-click 2 . and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system.64 On the Options Bar. 66 You can save the open file if you wish. 65 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create the Hot Water System on page 398. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and zoom in on the sinks. create the hot water system.

2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. to the left of the main cold water pipe. 6 On the Options Bar. 14 In the System Browser. and in the Type Selector. click Mechanical Equipment. select Water Heater : 40Gallon. and on the Options Bar. click Check None. and click to place the water heater as shown. and click Select. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. Create the Hot Water System | 399 . The Edit System toolbar is activated. and on the Edit 17 In the System Browser. click the water heater. click (Filter Selection). and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). click Finish. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system.rfa. select Plumbing Fixtures. click System toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Edit System). 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. 12 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. 16 On the Edit System toolbar. 10 Double-click Water Heater. expand Domestic Cold Water. and click Select. click the Training Files icon. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. and click View ➤ Piping. 5 In the Filter dialog. click the title bar for the browser. expand Domestic Hot Water. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. (Add to System). and click OK.

23 On the Plumbing tab. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. click (Edit System). specify 8' 6" for Offset. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 19 Using the same method. click Draw Pipe. add the water heater to the cold water system. 25 On the Options Bar. click Pipe.18 On the Options Bar. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. right-click the connector. 20 Select the water heater in the view. 400 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. click (Connect Into). and in the Type Selector. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. click when the hot water connector displays. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. and click the main cold water pipe. click OK. select the domestic cold water connector. and on the Options Bar. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase.

drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. click Pipe. 31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. and in the Type Selector. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink.27 Click Modify. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Plumbing tab. specify 2' 8" for Offset. and click to specify the end of the segment. 33 Click Modify. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. Create the Hot Water System | 401 .

the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. click Apply. specify 2' 8" for Offset. 36 Right-click the open connector. click Draw Pipe. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks.34 Select the middle sink in the view. 38 On the Options Bar. and click to end that segment. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and In this case. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 402 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing. and on the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. (Connect Into). click Pipe. 41 On the Plumbing tab. click click the hot water pipe below the sinks. double-click 3D. 40 In the Project Browser.

44 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Create the Hot Water System | 403 . 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. and click. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks.42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. 43 Click Modify. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. double-click 2 .Plumbing. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close. 46 You can save the open file if you wish.

404 .

By following the recommended workflow. manually modify the pipes and fittings. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. and finally. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. If the tutorial datasets are not present. In this lesson. In this tutorial. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. you will understand the process. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. insert fittings. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. After finishing each exercise. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. click Reload From. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. go to http://www. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. methodology. At the end of this tutorial. However.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. you can choose to save your work. create schedules. During the fire protection design process. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you create views and pipe types. if the link is lost. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model.rvt. As you create the systems. you create a wet and dry fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. 405 .Fire Protection Systems 8 In this tutorial. and select i Office Building. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. Then. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. However. and size and tag the pipes. Designing Fire Protection Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2009.

You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. Next. for Material. Next. Configure pipe conversion settings 10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. select Fire Protection Wet.Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. Next. right-click the Design Bar. select Carbon Steel. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Mechanical Settings. and click Duplicate. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. select Main. enter Fire Protection Wet. click Duplicate. for New. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. 12 For System Type. click the Training Files icon. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. 3 Right-click the copy. 7 With the Type Properties dialog open. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. and click Fire Protection. including the new material property.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 5 In the Rename dialog. you modify the pipe type properties. under Mechanical. and click Properties. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Rename. Create new pipe types 1 In the Project Browser. You create new pipe types. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. 8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 406 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 9 In the Type Selector. Open the i Starting the Fire Protection Project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. and click OK. 2 Right-click Standard. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Under System Type. and click OK. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.

22 While pressing Ctrl. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 17 Using the same method. verify that 9' 0" is selected. and specify Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping. 20 In the New Schedule dialog. for Offset verify 9' 0". select Fire Protection Wet. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Remove. select Area. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. select Branch. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. do the following: ■ Under Category. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 23 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. verify that 9' 0" is specified. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. To remove a field. 15 For System Type. ■ ■ Define columns 21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 14 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 16 Under System Type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. or architectural components. structural beams. for System Type Fire Protection Dry. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For Offset. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 407 . under Available fields. 18 Click OK. and click Add. duct. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. However. Create a Space Schedule 19 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.■ For Offset. Click OK. So. select Spaces. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select it.

For Field formatting. verify that (none) is selected. 26 In the Calculated Value dialog. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Create a calculated value parameter 25 Click Calculated Value. For Discipline. verify that Common is selected. Organize the data 28 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Field Format. Verify that equals is selected. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 130 square feet. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list).24 Select a field. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. For Then by. verify that Number is selected. select Level 2. 30 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Type. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. enter Area/130. For Formula. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each space. 29 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 27 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. For And. Verify that Ascending is selected. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. 408 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. Verify that Formula is selected. select Number. verify that (none) is selected. Under Level.

When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. Finally. Placing Sprinklers on page 410. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. For Units. Next. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select Fixed. Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal places. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you created a Space Schedule for fire protection systems. For Rounding. 32 You can save the open file if you wish. A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select 2 decimal places. you created new views and modified view properties. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces. you place the wet system sprinklers. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. In the next exercise. In this exercise. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 409 .31 In the Format dialog. Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. sorted according to space number. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. As a result. Click OK twice.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. When this happens. and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). 2 Enter ZR. When there is a small misalignment. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. You will use the schedule that you created in the previous exercise to identify the required number of sprinklers per room.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 5 On the Options Bar. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. Open the i Placing Sprinklers. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. click the Training Files icon. 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Sprinkler. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the spaces on level 2. 410 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 1/2" Pendent.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. As you place the sprinklers. and double-click 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. After placing the initial sprinkler. Place a sprinkler 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector.

The selected sprinkler displays in red. 11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid.6 With the view zoomed. and that Copy is selected. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and after the intersection snap displays. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. You copy this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. Placing Sprinklers | 411 . and click to place the sprinkler. click to specify the copy start point. click (Copy). 7 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Continue placing sprinklers 8 In the drawing area. select the sprinkler that you placed. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tile as shown.

Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. 412 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement.12 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. and after the intersection snap displays. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). The copy selection border follows the cursor. click to specify the copy end point.

click to specify the copy start point. verify Constrain is cleared. Copy is selected.A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 202. Placing Sprinklers | 413 . click (Copy). Next. Copy and array sprinklers 13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately below Office 201). 17 In Office 201. 16 On the Options Bar. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201. and after the intersection snap displays. 15 On the Edit toolbar. and select Multiple. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected.

414 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.18 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 202. and after the intersection snap displays.

and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. Placing Sprinklers | 415 .19 Move the cursor directly down.

The sprinklers are placed. 416 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

For Move To. 21 While pressing CTRL. 23 On the Options Bar. Clear Group And Associate. 22 On the Edit toolbar. select Last. click Modify. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. you array the other Office 202 sprinklers. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. Placing Sprinklers | 417 . it is an ideal situation to use an array. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202. Furthermore. Next. because all of the sprinklers in Office 202 are equally spaced. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays).20 On the Design Bar. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. Verify that Constrain is cleared. click (Array).

418 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. click to specify the array end point as shown. and after the intersection snap displays. and after the intersection snap displays. creating an array is a 2-step process. 25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. click to specify the array start point. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). to specify array end point. 24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202 sprinkler. You first specify an array start point.NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool.

Placing Sprinklers | 419 .The Office 202 sprinklers are placed.

29 On the Options Bar. and after the mid point snap displays. click (Copy). 420 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . A border displays around the selected sprinklers indicating the copy selection. 30 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. click to specify the copy start point. select both sprinklers in the corner office (Office 201). you place sprinklers in Office 203. 28 On the Edit toolbar.Next. clear Multiple. 26 Zoom out to view all 3 offices along the left wall. 27 While pressing Ctrl.

and after the mid point snap displays.31 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 203. Placing Sprinklers | 421 . click to specify the copy end point.

NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. 422 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps.

you place sprinklers in the large common space. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area. 37 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. 36 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Edit toolbar. Placing Sprinklers | 423 . 34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler. You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array. Open 204. 32 Click Modify. verify that Multiple is cleared. Next.You have now placed the sprinklers for 3 offices. click (Copy). Open 204.

40 Select the sprinkler that you copied. 43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. 39 Click Modify. The Office 203 sprinkler is copied to Open 204. For Move To.38 Move the cursor to the right into Open 204 as shown. For Number. You could copy sprinklers. 424 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. select 2nd. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. 41 On the Edit toolbar. Next. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 6 for the number of arrays. but creating an array is quicker. Verify that Constrain is cleared. click (Array). Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. click to place the sprinkler.

44 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. The array is created. Placing Sprinklers | 425 . Zoom out to display the array. click to specify the array end point as shown. and after the intersection snap displays.

Next. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. click to specify end point for the second array. 48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler as shown. 46 On the Edit toolbar. 426 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Verify that Constrain is cleared. 49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. For Number. you create multiple arrays based on this array. If you make a mistake placing the array. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. verify that 2nd is selected. click (Array). 45 While pressing CTRL. and after the intersection snap displays. undo the step and try again. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. enter 4 for number of arrays. select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204 space. 47 On the Options Bar. For Move To.IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately.

50 In the Revit MEP 2009 dialog. click Expand. click the check box associated with each warning. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. and click Delete Checked to delete the 3 sprinklers. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors. 51 Expand the 3 Warnings.The arrays are created. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 204 is complete Placing Sprinklers | 427 .

57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). 54 Open the Sprinkler -Upright. 428 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 56 Enter ZR. select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright.Next. and click Modify. move the cursor to the approximate center of the space. The sprinkler family loads into the project. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area.rfa file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder. you place a sprinkler in the Mechanical/Electrical space. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. you will use a non-hosted sprinkler. However. Load a new sprinkler family 52 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. first. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. To modify a family type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Because this space does not have a ceiling. and double-click 2 . click to place the sprinkler. click Sprinkler. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset).Fire Prot to make it the active view. you need to load them in the project. 59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. Place non-hosted sprinklers 55 In the Project Browser. 58 In the Type Selector. 53 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes.

Placing Sprinklers | 429 . and click Element Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. as shown. and on the Options Bar. select Wall Faces 65 Click the upper wall face. under Instance Parameters. 60 Right-click the sprinkler. click Dimension. and notice that the sprinkler displays in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 64 On the Design Bar. enter 10' 6". Do not click the vertical line that displays as the reference. click the center of the sprinkler. 66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall. and press Delete.Ceiling Fire Prot. Next you adjust the offset. for Offset. and when a dot displays click to specify the center.The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". double-click 2 . 62 Click OK. Unconstrain the sprinkler when deleting the dimension. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the 2 . and because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 67 Select the dimension. NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler. and move the dimension to the left. then click the wall face of the lower wall. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer.Ceiling Fire Prot view. 63 In the Project Browser.

68 Using the same method. then click Modify. Use sprinkler type: Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 1/2" Pendent for all rooms. Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 69 Using the placement methods that you have learned. center the sprinkler between the right and left walls. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. Round decimals up to the next whole number. Click to place the sprinklers on ceiling tile faces. You will create a Fire Protection Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. 430 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

then select Sprinklers.70 In the Project Browser.Fire Prot. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 73 You can save the open file if you wish. click Check None. and on the toolbar. click to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment. and click (Filter). double-click 2 . (Pin) 72 In the Filter dialog. 71 Draw a pick box around the entire model. Placing Sprinklers | 431 .

A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. Then you simplify the layout using tools from the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar to modify pipe branches after converting the initial layout to piping. and physically with piping. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Unlike logical connections (systems). Connecting the Sprinklers on page 432. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. However. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the next exercise. After creating the logical connection. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Open the i Connecting Sprinklers. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 432 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and double-click 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Prot to make it the active view.74 Click File menu ➤ Close. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.

click System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. click Check None. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. If the System Browser does not respond. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Connecting the Sprinklers | 433 . 8 On the Options Bar. then press F9. 4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. and display pinned and in red. select Sprinklers. 7 In the Filter box. click in the drawing area to make it active.Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected.

click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. In the System Browser. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and click Select. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. expand Piping. place the cursor over a sprinkler. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. right-click Fire Protection Wet.The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. press Tab. select an initial piping layout. under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. and a piping layout preview displays. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. named Fire Protection Wet 1. 434 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Next.

This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. verify that Main is selected. enter -12' 0". The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and for Offset. 14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and select solution 4. The layout path solution displays. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.NOTE The is selected. these settings will convert the base component to a 6" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). Click (Previous Solution). do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. 18 Click OK. 20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model. 17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 435 . verify that 6"150 mm is specified for D. and on the Options Bar. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right keyboard arrow keys. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. click Solutions. 23 On the Design Bar. When the layout is finished. For Offset. and click to place the base component as shown. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. select Branch. click Solutions. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Place Base. and on the Options Bar. click Settings. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell. 22 On the Options Bar. (Layout Path) button is available on the Options Bar whenever a system component 13 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that 9' 0" is specified.

click Modify. Modify the layout 24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. In general. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. you modify the selected layout. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 436 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .Next. A (parallel movement control) displays. then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 25 Zoom in on the vertical main. 26 Select the vertical layout path segment.

and midway between the sprinklers above the office as shown.27 Drag the parallel movement control to the left to a point to the right of the doorway for Office 216. Connecting the Sprinklers | 437 . 28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211.

31 Drag the it. 438 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 30 Select the horizontal branch pipe. (tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below 32 Scroll to the left. select the horizontal branch again.29 Drag the parallel movement control down until the pipe merges with the horizontal piping to the left. as shown. and drag the down to merge it with the horizontal piping below. feeding the sprinkler in Office 203. (elbow junction control) The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area.

click (Thin Lines). 36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. Next you combine the piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately. Connecting the Sprinklers | 439 . it is an opportunity to merge the piping into a shared branch. there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths. You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools. whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler. you have been using parallel movements to combine piping. Thin lines make it easier to see the various drag controls when using junction and elbow controls. However. Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping. 35 On the toolbar. 34 Select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in the left office.33 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. In general. 37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above. So far. as shown.

select a different layout solution. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Either relocate the system components. click Finish Layout. and drag the the branch piping. (elbow junction control) up to combine 39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. or manually modify the pipe.38 Select the horizontal branch again. 440 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. or that offset elevations are incorrect.

as shown. clear Sprinklers. 41 On the Options Bar. draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler. 43 Press Delete.Continue combining piping 40 Zoom in on Office 211. as shown. and click OK. click in Office 211. click (Filter). and verify that (Auto Connect) is selected on the Options Bar. right-click the connector at the open end. Connecting the Sprinklers | 441 . 42 In the Filter dialog. click to specify the end point. including the cross and transitions from the main piping. and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler 47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown. on the Options Bar. and the sprinkler in the open area. (Connect Into). click draw pipe. 44 Select the horizontal pipe. 46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted. 45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays.

49 Draw a pick box around the horizontal piping and fittings between the sprinklers in Office 216 and the main in Server Room 215. Reconnect the sprinklers in Office 214 and 216 52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216. 50 While pressing Ctrl. and drag the connector to the right to connect with the vertical pipe as shown. 51 Press Delete.48 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. 442 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and drag the top connector up to connect with the horizontal piping in the open area. as shown. 53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216. select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214. and press Delete. including the pipe and the tee as shown.

and do the following: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal pipe. 55 On the Design Bar. verify that (Auto Connect) is selected. and click to make the connection to the sprinkler. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 443 . Click Modify. ■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers. click to specify the end point for the pipe.54 Zoom in on the office in the lower-right corner. click Pipe. then drag the preview to the connector snap on the right-most sprinkler. Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler. Drag the preview down.

■ Reconnect the piping for Office 214 to the main 56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215.■ Select the sprinkler to the left. 444 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . (Trim/Extend). On the Options Bar. and on the toolbar click 57 Click each of the open-ended pipes. click (Connect Into). and click the horizontal pipe as shown.

you create the dry fire protection system. Check pipe connectivity 59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 445 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Next. After creating the system. The entire system should be highlighted. Open the i Completing the Wet System. 1 In the Project Browser. 60 You can save the open file if you wish.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 61 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the next exercise. and double-click the 2 . 2 Zoom in.Fire Prot view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 445. expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 58 Click Modify.An elbow is inserted to complete the connection. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you add the sprinklers in the upper half of the model to the existing wet system. and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. checked connectivity. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. indicating connectivity throughout the system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and press Tab twice. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and converted pipe fittings.

IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. air terminals. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). and AC units. mechanical equipment.Fire Prot view. you can select the pipe or duct. 5 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. and number of elements in the system. The Edit System toolbar displays providing system editing tools. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. fitting. or sprinkler in the current wet system. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. 446 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . radiators. such as VAV boxes. The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the upper half of the model. boilers. 4 In the 2 .3 Click the plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a cross. System tools display on the Options Bar. and so on) are logically connected by a system. select a pipe segment. system equipment. and pipe or duct is created. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name.

verify that None is specified. Select Multiple. For System Equipment. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out).6 On the Edit System toolbar. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 447 . 8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building. You cannot select them. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. For Number of Elements. 9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add To System). verify that 30 is specified. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. For System Name. This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. click 7 On the Options Bar.

(Layout 448 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Number of Elements now displays as 65 (sprinklers) in the system. On the Options Bar. click Paths). solution 1 3. and on the Options Bar. verify that Solutions is selected.The selected sprinklers display in red. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. 10 NOTE When you use multiple selections. click Finish to finish editing the system. 13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. 12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model. and click Modify. for Solution Type. 11 On the Edit System toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. select Network. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. On the Options Bar. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor. you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the selections. click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the system.

16 Select the vertical pipe to the lower sprinkler in the corner office (201). and drag the tee junction control to the intersection to the left as shown. 15 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the model. and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the branch piping as shown. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 449 . 17 Select the vertical branch again.The layout automatically provides a path from the upper layout to the cross created earlier.

The piping for the upper half of the model displays. 450 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . as shown. 19 Using the same method. The tee junction control will stop at the junction of the tee from the main piping. click Finish Layout.18 Scroll to the right and select the branch to the lower-right sprinkler in Office 208. Click the tee junction control again and continue the adjustment. drag each end of the branch to the left to combine it with the piping to the sprinkler just to above. 20 On the Design Bar.

and the pipes for this system would not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 215. In the next exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. After creating the system. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. For this exercise. In an actual dry system.Check pipe connectivity 21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell. and checked connectivity. The entire system should be highlighted. you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing system. 22 You can save the open file if you wish. it is enough show how the system is created without adding a valve. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. you create the dry fire protection system. As with the wet system. In this exercise. and press Tab 3 times. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 451. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 451 . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. a valve would isolate the dry system from the wet system. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. indicating connectivity throughout the system.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. and double-click 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Place sprinklers 2 Zoom in to view the 3 spaces at the bottom of the model.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 216. Open the i Creating the Dry System. Be careful to select only the sprinkler. If necessary. press Tab until the sprinkler displays on the status bar at the lower left corner of the window. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. 452 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. click to specify the copy start point. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. 8 Click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. as shown. click (Copy). Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 453 . The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling.4 On the Edit toolbar. Verify that Copy is selected. 7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215. along the same horizontal ceiling grid. and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. then move the cursor diagonally to the upper-right.

For Slope. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. click System Browser. 454 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . The system is created and listed in the System Browser. click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign the sprinklers to it. 10 In the Type Selector.Fire Prot to make it the active view. enter 1/8" / 12". Confirm and validate the system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. double-click 2 .Dry . Verify that Auto Connect is selected. and click Select The selected system displays in red. 14 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category.Next. Create the dry system 9 While pressing CTRL. select Sprinkler . This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. 11 On the Options Bar. verify that 1/2" is selected. The System Browser opens. 19 On the Options Bar. you change the sprinkler type. 17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter).Hosted : 1/2" Dry Pendent. 13 In the System Browser.Pendent . select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. click Pipe. select both Server Room 215 sprinklers. 18 In the Type Selector. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Create the dry system piping 15 In the Project Browser. For Offset. 16 Zoom in on Server Room 215.

click to connect the pipe. when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays. Do not connect to the upper right sprinkler. 22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and. to specify a starting point for the piping 21 Draw the pipe preview straight down to a point even with the lower-left sprinkler. and click. as shown. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 455 .20 Click the horizontal pipe directly above the upper-right sprinkler.

click Edit. 456 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and clear the Lines category. select any category. on the Model Categories tab. click All. Click OK twice. click All. under Instance Parameters. 24 In the Project Browser. select Show categories from all disciplines. as shown. 25 Right-click an empty area in the drawing area. click None. You can confirm this in the 3D view or by checking connectivity. and double-click 3D. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. All categories are selected except the Lines category. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. The pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper-right sprinkler. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Next. All categories are cleared. and click View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. and zoom in on the dry fire protection system. and clear a check mark from any category. expand Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 3D Views. 28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines. Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view.23 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool.

To follow good design practice. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. The slope value displays next to the slope control. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 457 . 31 On the Options Bar. click . and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. You can click the slope control to change the reference end for the slope. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes.30 Select the unconnected sprinkler. 32 Zoom the view.

458 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 3 In the Project Browser. First. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the i Modifying Pipe Diameters. TIP When you tile 2 views. Then. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 215. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. you placed dry system sprinklers. and double-click 3D to make the view active. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. Additionally. and double-click 2. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view.Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 33 Zoom out to display the entire model. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. You have completed the dry fire protection system. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. the active view is tiled to the left. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. highlight a pipe segment in the dry system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Modifying Pipe Diameters on page 458. click the Training Files icon. and press TAB 3 times.Fire Prot to make the view active. 2 If necessary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. indicating that they are connected. checked pipe connectivity.

height. Changing the diameter. click . or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. In the 2. and click OK. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. 8 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. width. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection piping. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 459 . NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. or height.You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. or width. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run.Fire Prot view. width. 7 On the Options Bar. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes.

verifying that it is connected. select the supply pipe in the stairwell. 10 On the Options Bar. select 1".9 Click in the 3D view to make it active. and press TAB twice. 12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment. for D: (diameter). All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 1 inch diameter except for the supply piping. and while pressing SHIFT. 11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 1 inch diameter on the Options Bar. the elbow and the horizontal pipe to the main piping to remove them from the selection. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. 460 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . zoom in on the supply pipe in the stairwell.

draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving. NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model. and on the toolbar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 461 . you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection.Modify the diameter of the main 13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. If branch segments are selected. select the model.

462 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and the supply pipe. the pipe fittings.14 With the main selected. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. while pressing CTRL.

Sprinklers Serviced 1. 18 On the Options Bar. use the pipes and pipe fittings. (Filter) to select only 16 Double-click the 3D view. select Fine. for D. 2 3 4. especially around the pipe fittings. The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire protection systems. 19 Validate the pipe run geometry. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. Modify the diameter of branch pipes 20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 15 On the Options Bar. and on the View Control Bar. for Detail Level. for D: 6". select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main. select Shading with Edges. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 463 .The main piping is selected and displays in red. NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings. and for Model Graphics Style. select 4". 17 In the 3D view.

select Shading with Edges. 22 Enter ZR. 23 On the View Control Bar.21 Click in the 2 . select Fine and for Model Graphics Style. 26 Select the next pipe segment and tee to the right. The specifications requires a diameter of 2" for this pipe segment.Fire Prot view to make it active. This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office. Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection. 24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as shown. select 2". The pipe diameter is modified. for Detail. and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215). You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements. 25 On the Options Bar. for D:. 464 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 offices in the building.

27 On the Options Bar. Next. It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view. zoom in on the piping to Office 216. 28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view. 29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 465 .This segment services 4 sprinklers. for D: select 1 1/2". and on the Options Bar. you continue to modify the pipe branch. for D:. select 1 1/2".

36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main. select Leader. NOTE Tags are view specific. Clear Leader. Tag the pipes 31 In the 2 Fire Prot view. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. for Pipes. verify that Pipe Size Tag is loaded. 32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 33 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. under Category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. and on the Options Bar. and after the segment highlights. for D: select 1 1/4". you place a tag and include a leader line. 466 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Tag ➤ By Category. click to place the tag. zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step. Next. press Tab until the pipe is highlighted place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. 38 Place the cursor over the vertical supply pipe in the stairwell. 34 In the Tag dialog. 35 Click OK. Click Tags.30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch.

and finish tagging the pipes. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. 2 3 4. Next. 40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. Sprinklers Serviced 1. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 467 . and finish placing the pipe tags. Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria.39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows).

In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter.42 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You added tags the pipes. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. The completed fire protection system is included in the i Completed Fire Protection System. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. For additional practice. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this tutorial. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. 468 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . You can save the open file if you wish. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe.

you use the Family Editor to modify and create tags and annotation symbols. Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular 469 . duct fittings. and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids. alarm systems and others. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. pipe fittings. medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. including power. you begin by modifying existing families to create new types. Before using this tutorial. After learning to modify an existing family. you should have a working knowledge of Revit MEP and experience with the actual components that you will be modeling. as after this selection is made. Steam. Revit MEP operation and the behavior of your components depends to a great extent on how you create specific components. In this tutorial. Pipe connectors are used for piping. In the third lesson. but also to understand how the settings in the Family Editor affect the family. ■ ■ NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. and other elements that are part of the air handling systems.Creating Revit MEP Content 9 This tutorial expands your knowledge of the Family Editor by introducing several unique features in Revit MEP. telephone. Family Editor Creating a family requires careful thought. The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family. it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly. ■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork. not only for the geometry. Revit MEP Content The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. you create a new lighting fixture and 2 pipe fittings. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections.

The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. navigate to a folder of your choice. Modifying a Fan Family In this exercise you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modify an existing family. There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. If you can find a component that is similar to the family that you want. select Electrical.rfa. click the Training Files icon. Modifying Families In this lesson. Save a copy of the family 1 Click File ➤ Save As. select 1 decimal place. For example. there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of attempting to create a single family with types to address every application. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor Exhaust Ventilator . for Rounding. 470 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Place connectors. Finally. 5 In the Format dialog. Map parameters Create multiple types within a family. instead of creating a new one. for Discipline. Create formulas for parameters. You can modify an existing component.Downblast . and then load it into the project. 2 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. open it in the Family Editor. Set project units 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Define shared parameters. it is easier to modify a component. you may want to create multiple types within the existing family instead of creating a new family. and save the family as Exhaust Ventilator . you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families. the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space. and for Current. You can create a component from scratch.mechanical. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall design. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family. electrical. At times. click the Format column. although it may be easier to modify an existing family.rfa. or plumbing component.Downblast. 7 Save the family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Project Units dialog. modify it as needed. 6 Click OK to close the Project Units window.

13 Browse to a folder. Add shared parameters to the Family Type 21 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 24 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. you will be prompted to choose a file from another project or to create a new file. click the Shared parameter option. and click Select. click New. NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this tutorial. Modifying a Fan Family | 471 . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. for Group parameter under. Shared_Parameters) for the shared parameter file. enter a File name (for example. Click Yes. To reuse this tutorial. and click Create. enter Text 18 Click OK. 15 For Name. enter Common For Type. click Add. under Parameters. select the Type option. under Groups. The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category. 17 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Family Types 9 In the Family Types dialog. 14 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 23 In the Family Types dialog. select the Shared parameter option. and click OK. 16 Under Parameters. enter Motor HP For Discipline. you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous step. and click Select. enter MEP. click New. under Parameters.Create Shared Parameters 8 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 19 Using the same method. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click OK. and click Save. select Motor FLA. select the Electrical Engineering. create additional shared parameters with the following properties: Name Voltage Motor FLA Power Phase Number of Poles Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Electrical Type Electrical Potential Current Power Integer Number of Poles 20 Click OK. click Add. 11 If you have not already created a shared parameter file.

as defined below: Parameter Phase Number of Poles Motor HP Power Group Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Type Type Type Type Create a parameter formula to calculate power 28 In the Formula column for Power. 3.8 Motor HP 1 2 3 34 Click OK. for Group parameter under. 31 Click OK.3 Ph Voltage 208 208 460 Phase 1 3 3 Number of Poles Motor FLA 2 3 3 8. and click OK.25 In the Shared Parameters dialog.208 V . 30 For Name. create additional Family Types with the following parameter values: Name 1 HP .1 Ph. for Parameter Group. under Parameters. enter the following formula: Voltage * Motor FLA * sqrt(if(Phase = 3. add the following shared parameters to the family type.5 4.115 V . under Parameter Data.4 Motor HP = 1/6 The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified. 472 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .208 V . Create New Family Types 29 Under Family Types.8 7.3 Ph 3 HP . 27 Using the same method. select Voltage. 1)) NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters you created. and click OK. 32 Specify the following values for the shared parameters in the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage = 115 Phase = 1 Number of Poles = 1 Motor FLA = 4. click New.460 V . enter 1/6 HP . 26 In the Parameter Properties. select Electrical Engineering.1 Ph 2 HP . select MEP. select the Type option. 33 Using the same method. 35 Save the family.

and verify that is selected.Add an electrical connector 36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems. Connections between components in a power system must have connectors with the same. 40 Click Modify Modifying a Fan Family | 473 . press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of the fan is highlighted. 37 On the Design Bar. 39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on the center of the face. Click and drag the View Cube at the upper right corner of the view to spin the ventilator as shown. click Electrical Connector. 38 On the Options Bar.Balanced. select Power . alarm systems and others. Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane. See Connectors on page 561. while pressing Shift. NOTE If necessary. system type. including power. TIP You can also hold the right mouse button. See Connector Placement on page 567. number of poles and the same voltage specified. and dragging the cursor to spin a model. The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in a power system. telephone.

474 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .) Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family This exercise demonstrates using various settings on the electrical connector to define a fan powered box with variable power requirements for electric heat and motor size. and observe the values in the Type Parameters 62 For Type. 44 On the Options Bar. select HVAC.Downblast.) 60 Click Modify. for Name. 47 Using the same method. (The exact location is not important.460 V . 55 On the Design Bar. 64 Save the family. 49 Click OK. 59 Move the cursor into the drawing area and click to add the Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 63 Click OK. click list. and in the Type Selector. 56 The i Sample Project.rvt. select Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. select Voltage. for Voltage. 50 Save the family. 53 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. 61 Select the fan. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select 3 HP . Flex the part 51 Click File menu ➤ Open. specify an associated family parameter for the following parameters: Parameter Number of Poles Apparent Load Associated (shared) Parameter Number of Poles Power 48 Under Electrical Loads.rvt file. click Mechanical Equipment. 43 Select the Electrical connector created in the previous section. click Family Types. and click OK.Map Parameter Values to Connector 41 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.rvt displays in the drawing area. 54 Click Window menu ➤ Exhaust Ventilator .3 Ph. in the = column. for Load Classification. It also demonstrates the use of shared parameters and parameter mapping. and click OK. (It is not necessary to save the i Sample Project. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 2 . The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types.Mech. 57 In the Project Browser. click . click 46 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click Load into Projects. 52 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa to make the family the active view. select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph. and again observe the Type Parameter values. 42 In the Family Types dialog. . 58 On the Mechanical Design Bar.

10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Parameter group. 2 Select the VAV box. 8 In the Shared Parameters dialog. Open the family and create parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select Electrical. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click 1 . you will need to complete that exercise to create shared parameters that are used in this exercise.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 470. 5 Click Family Types. For Type. go back and complete the previous Modifying a Fan Family exercise. under Parameters.rvt. select MEP. select the Shared parameter option. 11 Under Parameters. click the Training Files icon. It this is not the case. select MEP. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. 9 Click Edit. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 475 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The MEP group was created in the Modifying a Fan Family exercise and the parameters created in that exercise are listed under Parameters. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Power. click Add. 4 Click Yes when prompted to open the family for editing. For Discipline. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. select Power. 6 In the Family Types dialog. click Edit Family. for Parameter group. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise. click New. enter Apparent Power Phase 1. and click Select.

select the Instance option. 23 In the Formula column. under Parameter Data. specify formulas for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Voltage. and click OK. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. 21 Using the same method. click Add. enter 3. select Apparent Power Phase 2. create the following additional shared parameters as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor On Phase Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Type Power Power Power Integer 14 Click OK. and click OK. and click OK. 15 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 19 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 476 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Electrical Engineering. as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor FLA Motor HP Motor On Phase Number of Poles Phase Voltage Group parameter under Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Instance Instance Type Type Instance Type Type Type 22 In the Family Types dialog. select the Instance option. add the following shared parameters to the family type. select Apparent Power Phase 1. Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter name. and click Select. for Group parameter under. enter 480. verify that Size 2 .13 Using the same method.6 inch Inlet is selected for Name. and click OK 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Group parameter under. under Parameters. For Phase. select Electrical Engineering. Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering group in the Family Types dialog. 17 In the Family Types dialog. select the Shared parameter option.

Motor FLA * 277 V. 30 Save the family as Parallel Fan Powered VAV. For Motor FLA. 25 Under Family Types. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2. enter 3. enter 1. Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered when you created the parameters. Motor FLA * 277 V. 26 In the Name dialog. enter 1/6. in the Value column. ■ ■ NOTE Formulas are case sensitive.8 inch Inlet. For Motor HP. specify the following parameters for the Size 3 . enter Size 3 . create additional types. enter 1. Place connector and map parameters 31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown. enter 3. 24 Under Electrical Engineering.3.4 29 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog. and specify the parameters for each size listed below: Name Number of Poles 3 3 3 Motor On Motor HP Phase (Default) 1 1 1 1/3 1/2 3/4 Motor FLA Size 4 – 10 inch Inlet Size 5 – 12 inch Inlet Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet 2.8 inch Inlet type: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles.2. Motor FLA * 277 V. enter 1/4.9 3. and click OK. 27 In the Family Types dialog. For Motor On Phase. 0 VA). enter 1. 0 VA).6 inch Inlet VAV: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. 0 VA).2 5. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1. For Apparent Power Phase 2.rfa. For Motor On Phase. 28 Using the same method. enter 2. click new. For Motor HP. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 477 . For Motor FLA.■ For Apparent Power Phase 1. specify the following parameter values for the Size 2 . enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 3. For Apparent Power Phase 3.

select ■ ■ For Apparent Load Phase 1. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click in the column. click in the Voltage. column. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 478 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click to add the connector on the face. and click OK. For Apparent Load Phase 2. click Electrical Connector. 36 Select the connector. click . and click OK. select Power . and click OK. and click OK. 34 Highlight the large face on the controls box. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click in the column. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select Number of Poles.32 On the Design Bar. click in the column. select Apparent Power Phase 2. and verify that is selected. For Voltage. 33 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 35 Click Modify. select Apparent Power Phase 1.Unbalanced. specify values for the following parameters: ■ For Number of Poles.

42 In the Project Browser. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ For Motor On Phase. and C are 2512. and 1000. For Electric Heat Power. For Load Classification. ■ ■ 38 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog. The loads on phases A. select Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet.■ For Apparent Load Phase 3. 47 Verify that Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 2 . enter 3000. 43 Select the VAV box. for Type. and on the Options Bar. enter HVAC. respectively. B. 41 If prompted. 45 Click Modify. click in the column. . 46 Select the VAV box.6 inch Inlet is selected in the Type Selector. select panel HA. and click OK. 51 Click OK. 39 Save the family. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click . click (Edit Circuit on Panel). For System Type.Unbalanced is selected. for Panel. and specify the following parameters: ■ For Motor On Phase. and click . select Override parameter values of existing types. select Apparent Power Phase 3. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 479 . enter 2. 52 Select the VAV box. click Load into Projects. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and click Yes. and on the Options Bar. 48 In the Element Properties dialog.Power. Flex the family 40 On the Design Bar. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Power . and double-click 1 . click 44 Click (Create Power Circuit). enter 1. and on the Options Bar. 49 Click OK. 1000. 50 Select panel HA.

click Load into Projects. 60 Select the supply air connector. 57 Click OK. 64 If prompted. and in the drawing area. as shown.rfa. 66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room. Create a supply air system 65 In the Project Browser. The loads on phases A. 63 On the Design Bar. and 3667. Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV 58 Click Window menu ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV. 56 Select panel HA. click the VAV box. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Calculated is selected for Flow Configuration. and double-click 1 . and click Yes. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click . 55 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and C have updated to 4819. select 480 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. 62 Click OK. B.Mech.■ For Electric Heat Power. enter 11000. click . 54 Click OK. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components. 67 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. (Create (Select Equipment for System). select Override parameter values of existing types. respectively. 59 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so you can see the air supply connector. When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. under Mechanical. and on the Options Bar click Supply Air System). 4027.

For Offset enter 9' 0". verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. verify the following Main and Branch settings: Main ■ ■ For Duct Type. For Flex Duct Type. enter 6' 0". 70 Click OK 71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Ductwork is created for the selected solution. verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected.68 Click (Layout Paths). verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex .Round is selected. For Offset enter 9' 0". click Finish Layout. and click Settings. and on the Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 481 . Branch ■ ■ ■ ■ For Duct Type. 69 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. to select layout 6 of 6. click Design Bar.

and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 600 CFM. Using the combination of Preset and System settings on connectors lets you distribute flow according to the demands of a particular space. a boiler may have its supply preset to 20 gpm (system supply = 20 gpm) and the connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System. 80 Click OK. and select Properties. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 750 CFM. In this case the first downstream zone would receive a flow of 8 gpm (0.4 X 20 gpm). The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 600 CFM (4 X 150 CFM). This allows specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem. and select Properties. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow. 73 In the System Browser. with the total for all downstream components equal to 1. 79 In the Element Properties dialog.72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser. For example. The Flow Factor parameter is specified as a value between 0 and 1.6 inch Inlet VAV. but one with 0. 76 Click OK. Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. the new sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals. expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV: Size 2 . 482 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal. enter 300. 77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV.6 specified for Flow.4 specified for Flow and the other with 0. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1.6 X 20 gpm). 74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. 75 In the Element Properties dialog. and the other would receive a flow of 12 gpm (0. When Flow Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active. 78 Again.

Loads. click .Surface. you modify a 208V/3Ph panel to create a 240V/3Ph family. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorLighting and Appliance Panelboard . and then you use the new families in a project. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 2. select the connector. The final section demonstrates how to load. and connect components of the newly created families in a simple project. Modify an existing panel family 1 In the Project Browser.208V MCB . all instances of the family in a project will have the same factor. you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family. insert.240V MCB . specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Number of Poles. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. you modify existing electrical equipment families to create new families.Surface. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Electrical . Modifying Electrical Equipment In this exercise. 81 Close the Family and Sample Project files. 5 Click OK.rfa. In the first section. To create unequal percentages for several downstream subsystems. enter 240. and in the following section you modify a 480V/3Ph primary transformer to create a 480V/1Ph to 240V/1Ph secondary transformer. 7 In the Save As dialog.NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Voltage.rfa. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 483 . 2 In the drawing area. and then map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project.

23 Click OK. 22 Under Dimensions. except for 15 kVA. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 In the Name dialog.rfa. 17 Under Electrical. verify that 15 kVA is selected.8 Click File menu ➤ Close. click New. Load the new panel and transformer families into a project 27 Click File menu ➤ Open. Otherwise. you create a new family type. and click OK. 21 Under Electrical. click Family Types. verify the following: ■ ■ Primary Voltage is 480. select 112. you use the modified families in a project. 24 Click File ➤ Save As. and click Electrical. 12 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. delete all of the remaining types. Modify an existing transformer family 9 Click File menu ➤ Open. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Single Phase Transformer . for Name. click Delete. for Name.rfa. 29 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. click the Training Files icon. 13 For Name.480-208-120V . 11 Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorDry Type Transformers .5 kVA. 484 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Next. you modify an existing family type. NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar.NEMA Type 2.00 V. In the following sections. Next. enter 0' 10 1/2" For Width. for Primary Number of Poles. enter 3 kVA. enter 0' 8 5/8" NOTE You must enter 0 for the foot value. 25 In the Save As dialog. the inch value will be applied to the foot value. click the Training Files icon. enter 2. 19 Under Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Length. 18 Click Apply. 30 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. click Electrical Equipment. 15 Using the same method.rvt. enter 0' 6 1/2" For Height. 16 In the Family Types dialog. right-click the Design Bar. Notice that the new family type is selected for Name.480V Primary. 14 Under Family Types. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Primary Number of Poles is 2. 28 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

36 Move the cursor over the wall. 35 In the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. click to place the panel on the wall as shown. You can also click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The new families are loaded into the project. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 485 .240V MCB .Power to make it the active view. TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult.Surface. navigate to the folder where you saved the new families. do the following: ■ Place a Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel on the wall to the right of the first panel.31 On the Options Bar.240V MCB . NOTE The panel is a wall-hosted family—it can only be placed on a wall. click Electrical Equipment. 34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar.Surface : 100A. and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall.rfa and Single Phase Transformer . and double-click 1 . 32 In the Open dialog. click Load. Test the new electrical equipment in a project 33 In the Project Browser.rfa. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 37 Using the same method. then while pressing CTRL.480V Primary. TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment in the Project Browser. and click Open. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

Create a system 39 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel. select Distribution Systems.Loads. 486 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select 277. For Wires. Click OK. enter 480 Wye. 44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click . For Panel Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer. select 3.Loads. select 480. 45 Click Add. A new row is added in the right pane. under Electrical . 42 In the Element Properties dialog. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. select 480/277 Wye. under Electrical .■ Place a Single Phase Transformer . verify that Single is selected. select 480 Wye. for Distribution Sys. Create a new distribution system 43 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. L-G Voltage.480V Primary : 15kVA transformer on the wall between the panels. 47 Click OK. do the following: For Secondary Distribution System. enter DP. for Panel Name. 41 With the panel selected. 38 Click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar. click Electrical Settings. select the Single Phase Transformer. select 120/240 Single. For Phase. 49 On the Options Bar. 46 In the right pane. For L-L Voltage. For Distribution System Types. 48 In the drawing area. Next. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . and click OK. enter T-LC.

59 On the Options Bar. Click . . select T-LC. 55 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Panel. 58 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . under Electrical . click to create a new circuit. 56 On the Options Bar.51 In the drawing area. 52 With the transformer selected. This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer. for Panel Name. select the transformer.Loads. click a new circuit. ■ 57 In the Element Properties dialog. enter LC. For Panel. do the following: ■ ■ (Create Power Circuit) to create Click (Select a Panel for the Circuit). This indicates that the transformer is associated with that distribution system. select DP. select 120/240 Single. 61 Close the Simple Room without saving. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 487 . click 60 On the Options Bar.240V MCB . on the Options Bar. 53 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ For Distribution Sys.Surface : 100A panel. The DP panel is logically connected to the transformer 54 Click Modify.240V MCB . and on the Options Bar. Notice that 480 Wye is selected for Distribution Sys on the Options Bar. and click OK.Surface : 100A (LC) panel.

Toilet . 3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Modifying a Water Closet This exercise demonstrates adding piping connectors to a water closet family and setting typical connector properties for domestic cold water and sanitary systems.Wall Mount Flush Valve. click 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element. However. 1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component. you will be working at the back of the toilet. and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in the view. select Sanitary. 488 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Pipe Connector. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorCommercial . for System Type. 4 On the Design Bar. Select the wall. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. so you must hide the wall in the view.rfa. click the Training Files icon. (Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line. and verify that is selected. 5 On the Options Bar. and on the View Control Bar.

and move the cursor over the larger of the 2 round extrusions at the back of the toilet as shown. Modifying a Water Closet | 489 . click pointing away from the bowl. so that the connector direction is The arrow indicates the connector direction. 7 Click Modify. The connector direction determines the direction from which it will accept connections from other components.6 Zoom in. 9 If the arrow is pointing in toward the toilet bowl. 10 Click . not the flow direction. and click to add the connector. highlight the round face. 8 Select the connector.

specify values for the following parameters: For Radius. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Radius. enter 0 3/4". click 15 On the Options Bar. For Flow Direction. 13 Using the same method.11 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ to specify connector direction. and click Modify. add a Domestic Cold Water system Piping Connector. select In. select Fixture Units. enter 4. For Flow Configuration. select Out. 12 Click OK. enter 0' 1 1/2". 14 Select the connector. in the location shown. Clear Allow Slope Adjustments 490 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . . Select Allow Slope Adjustments For Fixture Units. For Flow Direction. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.

Ceiling Mech. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family | 491 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon.5.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. enter 2. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. select a diffuser tag.Commercial Wall Mount Flush Valve. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Toilet . and in the Save As dialog. For Fixture Units. and double-click 1 . 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Click OK. 18 Click File ➤ Save As. 2 In the drawing area.■ ■ For Flow Configuration.rfa. you modify a diffuser tag family to provide a type mark instead of the default instance mark. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. select Fixture Units.

(Remove parameter (Add parameter to label). and on the Options Bar. 4 Select the top label (1i). 492 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .3 On the Options Bar. select Mark. and click 7 Click OK. select Type Mark. and click Yes when asked to open the diffuser tag for editing. click Edit Label. The diffuser tag is composed of two labels separated by a horizontal line. click Edit Family. 5 In the Edit Label dialog. under Label Parameters. and click from label). The sample text changes to 1t. Each label is associated with a parameter. 6 Under Category Parameters. The Family Editor opens.

The project becomes active and the diffuser tag updates to display the supply air terminal type. without saving. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 493 . and click OK.rvt. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Yes. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family.8 On the Design Bar.rvt. in the Load into Projects dialog. click the Training Files icon. you modify a light fixture tag family to include panel and circuit information. click Load into Projects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. If more than one project is open. S-1. and the return air diffuser type. select i Sample Project. 9 When prompted to overwrite the existing Diffuser Tag. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. R-1.

2 In the drawing area.1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. The Family Editor opens. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 In the drawing area. click Edit Family. 5 On the Edit toolbar. and press Enter to specify the copy end point. and double-click 1 . The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter. and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag for editing. and after listening dimensions display. 7 Click the midpoint of the label to specify the copy start point. select a light fixture tag.Lighting. select the 1i label. click Multiple. enter 0 1/8". click (Copy). 8 Move the cursor straight down. 494 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 495 . 9 Repeat the previous steps to create a second copy of the label.The label is copied.

496 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . (Remove 15 Under Label Parameters. under Label Parameters. Notice that the bounding box contains only the first label. and click parameter from label). 12 Select the middle label. 13 In the Edit Label dialog.10 Click Modify. select Type Mark. you modify 2 labels. select Panel. You need to modify this box. The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter. for the Panel parameter. enter PNL in the Sample Value column. Next. and on the Options Bar. click Edit Label. 16 Click OK. and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels. The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor. 14 Under Category Parameters. and click (Add parameter to label). 11 Select the bottom line of the box.

click Load into Projects.rvt. and click (Remove parameter from label) (Add parameter to label). in the Load into Projects dialog. Load the light fixture tag family into a project 18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click For the Circuit Number parameter. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are. select Type Mark. select i Sample Project. ■ ■ Under Category Parameters.17 Using the same method. select Circuit Number. and click Yes. If more than one project is open. and the light fixture tags update to display the panel and circuit information. enter CKT in the Sample Value column The 3 light fixture labels are as shown. 19 If prompted. modify the bottom label with the following Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Label Parameters. and click OK. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 497 .

or profile). There are various light fixture family templates available in Revit MEP. you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture. model. You cannot change these characteristics after you have created the family. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. The hosting of a component is defined by the template used when the family is originally created. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. it is important that you start your lighting family with one of these templates. Creating a Light Fixture Family In this exercise you create an 8” ceiling hosted recessed downlight. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. In some cases. 9 Save the newly-defined family. If you expect to render your lighting designs. The process of creating a component family includes the following steps: 1 Select the appropriate family template. Templates also define the type of family (annotation. the template also defines characteristics of how the family works. such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. For example. titleblock. as they have reference 498 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . without saving. Creating Families In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families.20 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior.

Tilt Plane. For generic (Lighting Fixture*. or a generic fixture. a spot fixture. The Linear template contains a model line representing the light source along the F/B axis. ceiling hosted. and Light Source Elevation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). Spot Tilt Angle. 8 In the Project Browser. This file contains engineering data that can be used to calculate the coefficient of utilization of the fixture.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path.ies file. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. and copy the Ltl9815. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 499 . Additionally. there are lighting templates for non-hosted. you can also specify a . 3 In the New dialog. select the Normal option Clear the Shared option NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP.rft) lighting templates. Each family has additional parameters depending on whether it is a linear fixture.ies files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. select Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. and move with. the family will have the additional parameters: Spot Beam Angle.ies file is not used for rendering. select Lighting Fixtures.rft.planes that define the location of the light source. When you use a spot light template. Locate IES data file 1 Using Windows Explorer. 7 Click OK. 5 Under Family Category. and double-click Front. and click Open.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). 6 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the Always Vertical option Select Light Source For Part Type. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. these planes are Light Source Axis (L/R). For spot light templates (Spot Lighting Fixture*.ies file. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. (This is the location from which the . This can be shortened or lengthened as necessary to model the linear lighting fixture.rft. Using this face hosted family provides the ability for the fixture to be hosted by. and wall hosted objects. you may use a non-lighting family template. these planes are Light Source Axis (F/B). Using the generic face hosted and non-hosted lighting fixtures has the limitation that the hosting geometry cannot be cut. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. The . objects in the linked file. Lighting manufacturers often allow you to download . When working in a linked file environment. Spot Spread Angle. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\IES folder. such as Generic Model face based. Light Source Axis (L/R). and Light Source Elevation.rft).rft) and linear (Linear Lighting Fixture*. Create a new lighting family 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. you must determine the correct path to the IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit.ies files from the Web for their fixtures. When creating a lighting family.

4" above the Light Source reference plane. and draw a 4" horizontal line to the left of the center. Define the fixture geometry 12 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 11 In the Save As dialog. then draw a vertical line segment down to the ceiling (8"). . and Chain.rfa. enter 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. and drag it up to a point 4" above the Basic Ceiling and Ceiling Plane as shown. and finish with a 1" horizontal line segment to the left. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 13 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. for File name. Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane. and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown. and for Offset.TIP You may want set the scale to 6" = 1' . 9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 500 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation. click .0" and zoom in very close to create the Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. specify 0' 0".

offset by 1/16" to define the thickness of the light fixture housing. press Tab to highlight the short line. 17 On the Options Bar.Next you will duplicate the original outline. click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the short horizontal line at the base. 18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1/16" above the existing line as shown. and for Offset. enter 1/16". then click just above the line. 19 Using the same method. 16 Click Lines. click . Creating a Light Fixture Family | 501 . move the cursor over the line.

clear Chain. and for Offset. click Lines. enter 0' 0". click and .20 On the Design Bar. 22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown. 502 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 21 On the Options Bar.

click Axis. 26 Click Finish Sketch. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 On the toolbar. The length of the line and its exact location are not important. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 503 . but make sure it is coincident with the vertical plane.23 Click Modify. and clean up the inside corner as shown. click (Trim). and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the dark line.

for Emit from Shape. click (Point).27 Save the family. not grey) 504 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .Lighting ■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization. click Family Types. Define family and connector properties 28 In the drawing area. 30 On the Design Bar. specify values for the following parameters: Under Electrical . click Light Source Definition. 31 In the Family Types dialog. 29 In the Light Source Definition dialog. and click OK. select true (green check. for Light distribution. click (Photometric Web). select the (yellow) Light Source. and on the Options Bar.

enter CF42TRT Under Photometrics ■ ■ For Tilt Angle. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 505 . and click OK. 35 On the Design Bar. click the Value column. and select Ltl9815. enter 0. and double-click View 1. and on the Options Bar. 33 In the Project Browser.21 VA Under Electrical ■ For Lamp. enter 90 For Photometric Web File. and verify that (Place on Face) is selected.Under Electrical Loads ■ For Apparent Load.ies in the ■ For Light Loss Factor. enter 3000 K and click OK. and in the Initial Color dialog. and click OK. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average Estimated Illumination. click Luminous Flux. select Power . or a static value may be entered.Balanced. and in the Initial Intensity dialog. For Initial Color. enter 44. click the Value column. click the Value column.85 for Value. and in the Light Loss Factor dialog. 34 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model to view the top of the fixture. and is affected by the following fixture properties: ■ ■ ■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance) Initial Intensity (Type) Light Loss Factor (Type) 32 Click OK. click file browser . for Color Preset. for Color Temperature. expand View (All) ➤ 3D Views. enter 3200. select <Custom>. click Simple for Method. click the Value column. ■ ■ A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen output of the lighting fixtures in the room. For Initial Intensity. click Electrical Connector.

and click to place the connector on the top of the fixture. 40 Save the family Cut a hole in the ceiling 41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. it permits light to function as expected in renderings. and on the View Control Bar. and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog. and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim (Temporary Hide/Isolate). enter 277 For Load Classification. and double-click View 1.Balanced is specified For Apparent Load.) In the Project Browser. 43 Select the yellow Light Source.95 For System Type. click and select Hide Element. click Opening. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. and click OK. specify values for the following parameters: For Power Factor. click ring as shown. 44 On the Design Bar. click in the column. enter Lighting ■ ■ 39 Click OK. . For Voltage.36 Highlight the face at the top of the fixture. select the connector. and click ■ ■ ■ . enter 0. 506 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . (Light at the intersection of planes is able to pass through the ceiling. verify that Power . 38 In the Element Properties dialog. Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents. select Apparent Load from the list. 45 On the Options Bar. 37 Click Modify. 42 Spin the model to view the bottom of the ceiling.

Revit MEP provides a Flange Family | 507 . This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. 51 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room.rvt. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The space tag indicates 22 fc and 135 W. and in the Type Selector. In this exercise. The flange will be based on a 150 pound pressure class slip on flange. Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external . and use a Lookup Table to define several sizes for the flange. 48 Save the family. click the Training Files icon. 54 On the Design Bar. click Hide/Isolate. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. 55 Select the 4 downlights in the room.Ceiling Elec. 53 Click Window menu ➤ 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. 52 In the Project Browser. and the wattage increases to 168. select 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. you will create a flange connector to model pipe flanges for model coordination. and select Reset Temporary The basics of how lighting families work How to create a lighting family from a template Where to place IES files for use by lighting families Flange Family In this exercise. and double-click 1 . Flex the light fixture 49 Click File menu ➤ Open. click 47 On the View Control Bar. The lighting level increases to 33 fc.On the View Control Bar.rfa to make the family the active view. The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project. you learned: ■ ■ ■ (Temporary Hide/Isolate).46 Click Finish Sketch. click Load into Projects.csv file.

and click OK. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder.text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. select Piping For Type. Clear the Shared option. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. 6 Click OK. 2 In the New dialog.csv) file. and copy the Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. select Pipe Fittings. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. 7 Click File ➤ Save. When installed in the default path. (This is the location from which the LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. 8 Using Windows Explorer. 10 Under Parameters. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. and in the Save As dialog. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. The Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. See Lookup Tables on page 568 and CSV File Structure on page 569.csv file.ini file. select the Transition option. Revit MEP looks in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables to retrieve size information. select Dimensions Select Type 508 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Create parameters 9 Click Family Types. select Generic Model. enter NR For Discipline.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder).rfa. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rft. verify that Family parameter is selected for Parameter Type and specify the following parameter data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.csv file defines multiple sizes for this flange. 5 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear the Work Plane-Based option. For Part Type. Select the Always Vertical option. select Pipe Size For Group parameter under. 4 Under Family Category. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Add.

enter D1 / 2 For R2. 13 Using the same method. ND) For D2. and double-click Ref. LenA1. ND) For LenA1. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. select Pipe Size. 17 Save the family. 22 Click to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the right of the center line. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ For NR. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. D2. ND) 16 Click OK. Flange Family | 509 . enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. and for Offset.12 Click OK. "D2". select the Family parameter option For Discipline. 0’. "LenA1". 15 Specify formulae for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND. LenA3. 0’. "LenA2". "D1". enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 20 On the Design Bar.csv Click Apply. For Type. R1. enter NR * 2 For R1. ND) For LenA2. 21 On the Options Bar. enter LenA2 – LenA1 For D1. click . ND. 19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. create Instance parameters named D1. 0’. and select 3” = 1'. Define work planes 18 In the Project Browser. R2 and specify the following parameters for each one: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Piping. click Ref Plane. Select the Instance option 14 In the Family Types dialog. For Group parameter under. 23 Click again to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the left of the center line as shown. select Dimensions. enter D2 / 2 For LenA3. Level. 0’. enter 0' 2". LenA2. enter 2" For Lookup Table Name = Generic 150 psi Slip Flange.0". expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans.

click Dimension. 31 Click Modify.24 Click Modify 25 Select the left plane and. 28 On the Design Bar. click (Aligned). under Identity Data. 510 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter Connector for the Name of the right plane. enter Pipe. click . 27 Using the same method. 29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane. for Name. and on the Options Bar.

between the intersections with the right and left vertical planes as shown. and click OK. The length is not important. and 44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes. and select Not a Reference. 42 Click OK twice. and label it LenA2. and set the Projection Line weight of each category to 5. 48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click Visibility. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 47 Select the 3 model lines. 38 Click OK. select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right) plane. clear Fine.32 Select the dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and right plane (Connector) and click . for Is Reference. click LenA1 from the list. 45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane. 43 On the Design Bar. Flange Family | 511 . click . Define geometry 40 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and on the Options Bar. and select 33 In the Element Properties. This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project. under Other. under Other. but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes. 39 Save the family. 36 Click . click Object Styles. 46 Click Modify. click Model Lines. click the Value column. click the Value column for Label. . 41 On the Model Categories tab. 34 Using the same method. clear Chain.

50 In the Element Properties dialog. move the cursor to the left. 51 Click OK. 55 Click . and select Not a Reference. we shut off the linework in Fine view. click . 512 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. click the Value column. 53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line. click . click Dimension. and on the Options Bar. then select the other endpoint. press Tab to highlight the endpoint. 49 With all 3 lines still selected. and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension. and on the Options Bar. Thus. for Reference.NOTE Piping objects generally show as linework in Coarse and Medium view. under Other. 57 On the Design Bar. and in Fine view the solid model elements are shown. 54 Select the horizontal reference plane. click . create dimensions for the right vertical line. 56 Using the same method. 52 On the Design Bar. create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line. 58 Using the same method. from endpoint to endpoint.

and on the Options Bar. and enter 0' 5". click the Value column. 71 Select the circle. 66 In the Work Plane dialog. under Other. click and . and click OK. and select R2.59 Click Modify. select the dimension for the right line and label it D1. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 Click Lines. click Set Work Plane. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. click Radius. 70 Click Modify. click the Value column. 68 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for Label. 64 On the Design Bar. and click . click . for Label. and select D2. 60 Select the dimension for the overall length of the left line. specify Reference Plane : Pipe. 69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. and in the drawing area. click 72 Select the dimension line. Create the first extrusion 63 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Elevation 1). Flange Family | 513 . 65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. 62 Using the same method. . and double-click Left. under Other.

. in the 86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. 84 Click Lines. for Label. for Visibility/Graphics. 79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. select LenA2. and click 91 Click OK. 90 In the Element Properties. click and . and click OK. 88 Select the circle. 83 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. 76 In the Element Properties dialog. 77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and enter 0' 10". click column. 78 Under Graphics. Create the second extrusion 81 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 85 On the Options Bar. 80 Click Finish Sketch. 82 On the Sketch Editor tab on the Design Bar. click Edit. 514 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 87 Click Modify. click the Value column. for Extrusion End. specify Reference Plane : Center (Left/Right). and select R1. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK twice.74 Click OK. click Radius. click 89 Select the dimension line. under Constraints. . under Other. and in the drawing area. 75 Click Extrusion Properties. clear Coarse and Medium.

103 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. where the 2 extrusions meet. Flange Family | 515 . click extrusions. 100 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. and click OK. and double-click View 1. Add connectors 99 In the Project Browser. 97 Click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. (Model Graphics Style). 94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. for Visibility. and select 6” = 1'. 95 Under Graphics. 105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange. and select Wireframe to view both in the 102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown. 101 On the View Control Bar. 104 On the Options Bar. and for System Type. 98 Save the family. clear Coarse and Medium. 96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog.92 Click Extrusion Properties. verify that is selected. click column.0". click Edit. for Extrusion End. select LenA1. select Fitting. 93 In the Element Properties dialog. click Pipe Connector. and click OK twice.

to change the direction of flow. 107 Click Modify. under Dimensions. and click OK. 109 With the connector selected. click and.106 Click to add the connector. enter 5". 108 Select the connector. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. 110 In the Element Properties dialog. 516 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click . if necessary. for Radius.

112 Click Pipe Connector. and using the same method.111 Spin the flange to view the back of the larger extrusion. Flange Family | 517 . add a connector to the larger extrusion.

if necessary. and by defining fitting size parameters. 116 Click Modify. under Dimensions.113 Click Modify. to change the direction of flow. 115 Select the first connector. You then create single line geometry for the elbow. After completing the pipe fitting family. 117 Select both connectors. First. you create an elbow pipe fitting family. you create the physical fitting geometry by using reference planes and lines. click and. and click the second connector. 118 In the Element Properties dialog. click 119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. for Radius. in the column. test the fitting geometry. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. 120 Save the family Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family In this exercise. and on the Options Bar. and click OK twice. you can use the same method to create a duct fitting family for air systems. 518 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Link Connector on the Options Bar. click . and set the object visibility. 114 Select the connector. select NR.

It may take a longer to complete this exercise as compared to other exercises in this tutorial. click the current scale value. 2 In the New dialog. click . Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project. on the Edit toolbar. under Family Category. 9 In the Project Browser. You can also press CTRL+S.NOTE Fittings are among the most complex families to create. For Part Type. and save the family as Threaded Generic Elbow. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Level to make it the active view. creating system families typically takes more time to complete.rft. 14 Select the 2 reference planes. Verify that Shared is cleared. 10 Maximize the Ref. Configure the elbow pipe fitting family 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. verify that Imperial Templates is selected. and verify that both reference planes have been pinned. Click Open. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 519 . Select Generic Model. one window for each open project remains open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. However. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Work Plane-Based is cleared. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. 7 Click File ➤ Save. and double-click Ref. select Pipe Fittings: 5 Under Family Parameters. A new family file is created and new views open. Define reference planes Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family Editor. They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model. Verify that Always vertical is selected. if you have other projects open during a session. navigate to a folder of your choice. Level floor plan window. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 8 In the Save As dialog. and select 6" = 1'-0". If necessary. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. It is recommended that you methodically follow the steps and periodically check your work against the exercise. select Elbow. 6 Click OK. Even if you have created parametric families before.

and in the Element Properties dialog. 21 Using the same method. 15 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object. under Identity Data. and on the Options Bar. 18 Click Modify. enter 0' 1". A tooltip and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name. 17 Click to the left the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane to place a new reference line to the left of the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane. click .Pinning prevents accidentally moving the reference planes. enter Coupling. click . and for Offset. 22 Select the horizontal Center (Front/Back) reference plane. 23 Add new reference plane 2" above the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. for Name. 19 Select the left plane. for Name. and click OK. add another vertical plane 2" to the left of the left (Fitting) plane. 16 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Fitting. 520 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

verify that 0' 0" is specified. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Create reference lines and dimension them Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family. click Reference Lines. for Name. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 521 . 25 Right-click the new reference plane. and click Element Properties. For Offset. You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry. and click OK. Verify that Radius is cleared. (Line) is selected.24 Click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. enter Radius. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. 29 On the Options Bar. They are not displayed when the family is used in a project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected.

35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. draw a horizontal line of the approximate length and location as shown. draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane as shown. align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical reference plane (Coupling). Next. 32 Select the middle vertical reference plane (Fitting).30 In the drawing area. you draw an arced reference line. 522 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 34 Using the same method. 36 Using the same method. 31 On the Edit toolbar. click (Align). 33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane. 37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. and click the right end of the reference line to align the right end of the reference line to the Fitting reference plane. 38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown.

verify that 0' 0" is specified. click Reference Lines. ■ You may need to click ■ ■ For Offset. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. Verify that Radius is cleared. and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ). 44 Click Modify. click the right end of the left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc. 41 In the drawing area. 42 Move the cursor directly down. 40 On the Options Bar. enter 45. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 523 . and after the endpoint snap displays. 43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc.39 On the Design Bar. and press Enter to specify a 45 degree radius for the arc. (Arc from center and endpoints). select this sketching option from the list. and. 45 Select the arc reference line. click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to specify the center of the arc.

Next. 47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line. Verify that Radius is cleared. dimensions are temporary—they only display when selected. 51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference plane. 48 On the Design Bar. 524 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of the arc). (Line) is selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. click Reference Lines. The dimension control located near the reference plane represents the projected length of that line relative to the reference plane. and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown. For Offset. and adjust the length of the witness lines as shown.NOTE Temporary dimensions have two dimension controls that allow you to convert the temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point. 49 On the Options Bar. By default. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. you draw a diagonal reference line. The dimension control that is located perpendicular to the line being dimensioned represents the overall length of that line.

53 Select the diagonal reference line. 55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way. 60 With the Dimension tool active. 57 In the Type Selector. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected. and add an angular dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which is located below the diagonal reference line). 56 On the Design Bar. 58 On the Options Bar. Between the Coupling and the Fitting vertical reference planes. convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal reference line to a permanent dimension. 59 Add the following aligned dimensions: Between the Radius and the Center (Front/Back) horizontal reference planes. verify that ■ ■ ■ (Aligned) is selected. zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls. click Dimension. Between the Fitting and the Center vertical reference planes. 52 Click Modify. and clean up the witness lines as necessary. 61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown. the Tangent Extension tooltip may display to indicate that the diagonal reference line is tangent to the arced reference line.While drawing the diagonal reference line. on the Options Bar. 54 Using the same method. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 525 . click (Angular).

64 In the Family Types dialog. 65 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The new family parameter. click Add. select Piping. select Dimensions. create the following family parameters: Name Discipline Type of Parameter Group parameter under Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Angle Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Instance/Type Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance LenA2 BdyRad CplRad NomDia NomRad Ang Piping Piping Piping Piping Piping Common 526 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog. 68 Using the same method. For Type of Parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. under Parameter Type. Create family parameters and assign them to dimensions 63 On the Design Bar. 66 Under Parameter Data. LenA1. For Discipline. verify that Family parameter is selected. click Family Types. Select Instance to create an Instance Parameter. under Parameters. For Group parameter under. enter LenA1.62 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. select Pipe Size. 67 Click OK.

Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. 74 Press CTRL+S.25". 75 Using Windows Explorer. 69 In the Family Types dialog. in the Formula column. the calculated length defines the geometry. The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter. in the Value column. select the LenA1 family parameter. 73 Using the same method. enter LenA1 * tan(Ang / 2). enter 2". Lookup tables are not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by various project-specific factors. in the Value column. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back) and Radius reference planes. 70 Click OK. and copy the Threaded Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 527 . enter NomRad * 2. for Label. NOTE When specifying formulae. in the Formula column. Use a lookup table file to define multiple sizes A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information. NOTE Associate each dimension separately.Next. select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter as this will cause errors. Fittings must have their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right) and Center (Front/Back) reference planes. For NomRad. 71 In the drawing area. 72 On the Options Bar. For LenA2. specify that following values and formulae: ■ ■ ■ ■ For CplRad. you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added. Revit MEP uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter. enter 1. NomDia.

csv and click Apply.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). Level floor plan is the active view. copy the lookup table data from the problematic lookup table file and paste it into a new text file. 82 In the New dialog. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted.rft. enter Threaded Generic Elbow.csv lookup table file.csv file extension and copy it to the LookupTables folder. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. 0. Create a fitting profile You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion. RELATED During fitting creation. verify that the Ref. "BdyRad". enter the following formulae: ■ ■ ■ For LenA1. This sweep uses the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry. 83 In the Project Browser. if specific pipe sizes that you need are not present in the lookup table file by default. NomDia). NomDia). Next. If the file is saved in a proprietary format. NomDia). enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. For BdyRad. in the Value column. 0. you must save the lookup table file in a plain text format. NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path.Generic Elbow. and click Open. Save the text file with the file name including the . enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. If you encounter this type of issue. 76 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 79 Click OK. For CplRad. However. 78 In the Formula column. "LenA1". 77 In the Family Types dialog. select Profile. you can add them according to manufacturers’ specifications. Revit MEP may not be able to read it and any family type parameter formulae that refer to that lookup table will most likely return a value of 0 and errors will occur. you begin creating the fitting geometry. click Family Types. 0. 81 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 80 Press CTRL+S to save the family. you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size. 528 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . This is the default path. "CplRad". Next. for Lookup Table Name.

click the current scale. ). verify that 0' 0" is specified. 98 Zoom in to view the sketch. select Center Mark Visible. 95 Select the circle. 89 Select the circle.84 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Verify that Radius is cleared. 93 Click to lock the circle to the horizontally. enter 1". do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. and select 6" = 1'. and then click the circle center mark to align the circle horizontally. You may need to click ■ ■ and select this sketching option from the list. 88 Click Modify. zoom out. 94 Using the same method. draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown. and click the dimension control ( The temporary dimension converts to a permanent dimension. 97 On the View Control Bar. click Lines. under Graphics. 86 On the Options Bar. click . The center mark displays allowing you to align the circle to the reference planes. align and lock the circle vertically. 87 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. 90 In the Element Properties dialog. 92 Click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 529 . click (Align). and click OK. verify that Profiles is selected. For Offset. 85 In the Type Selector. 96 Click the dimension value.0". ■ (Circle). 91 On the Edit toolbar.

under Family Types. under Parameter Data. The new family type is listed in the Name list. select Piping. create a family type named Coupling. For Discipline. click New. select Rad. Verify that the Type option is selected to create a Type parameter. Fitting. Click OK. click Add. and click OK. under Parameters.99 On the Design Bar. Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. select Dimensions. 102 In the Family Types dialog. 105 In the Family Types dialog. 100 In the Family Types dialog. select Pipe Size. 101 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click OK. you create a new family type. click Family Types. 103 Name the new family type. enter Rad. 530 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 106 In the drawing area. The dimension is now associated to and controlled by the Rad family parameter. 104 Using the same method. select the dimension. 107 On the Options Bar. For Group parameter under. The new family parameter is listed under Dimensions. for Label. For Type of Parameter.

TIP Remember that when you use cross-picking (drag right to left) to select an object. Create sweeps using reference lines The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. 116 In the Associate Family Parameter. the cross-picking border only needs to intersect an object in order to select it. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. Next. select Fitting. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. right click Coupling. click . 111 In the Type Properties dialog. 110 In the Project Browser.108 Click File ➤ Save. Associate family parameters to a profile parameter You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the radius of the elbow fitting geometry. 113 In the Type Properties dialog. you create the fitting geometry. You create sweeps using the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry. under Dimensions.Generic Elbow project becomes active. Notice that the Threaded . The object does not need to be fully contained within the border. click . and click OK twice. Each sweep is based on the profile that you created and loaded into the project. and click OK. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur. 115 Under Dimensions. for Rad. 109 On the Design Bar. 118 In the drawing area. and save the family as Threaded Pipe Profile. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 531 .rfa. select CplRad. you load the fitting profile into the project. and click Properties. 114 For Type. select BdyRad. In contrast. click Apply. Next. for Rad. 117 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Threaded Pipe Profile. 112 In the Associate Family Parameter. an object must be fully contained when using a pick box (drag left to right). click Load into Projects to load the Threaded Pipe Profile into the Threaded – Generic Elbow family.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. Y. 121 On the View Control Bar. 123 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Path. 532 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Path. click (Filter Selection). do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list. click the red dot on the horizontal reference line. select the left horizontal reference line. 125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. 127 On the Options Bar.119 On the Options Bar. 124 In the drawing area. 122 On the Design Bar. Only the reference lines and reference planes display. click Finish Sweep. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and Angle options are specified at 0. Verify that the X. 126 In the drawing area. and click OK. clear Reference Lines and Reference Planes. 120 In the Filter dialog.

131 In the drawing area. and Angle options are specified at 0. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list. 134 On the Options Bar. 133 In the drawing area. 135 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Pick Path. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 533 . click Finish Sweep. Verify that the X. you create the geometry for the fitting body. 130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select the arced reference line.The geometry for the left coupling is created. Y. click Finish Path. 132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. click the red dot on the arced reference line.

139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. Next. enter VG. Next. you verify the fitting geometry. 534 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .The geometry for the fitting body is created. 137 In the Project Browser. and click OK. clear all annotation categories. and select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling. 136 Using the same method. you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting. add a solid sweep. 138 With the 3D view active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. The fitting geometry displays. The elbow fitting geometry is created.

click The 3 sweeps are selected. you need to hide some of the geometry in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display. you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. 141 In the Project Browser. and click OK. drag the cursor to spin the model. Create detail level geometry Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level. The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe fittings as double line. click Check None. First.140 While pressing SHIFT and the middle mouse button. 142 Press CTRL+S to save the family. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 535 . Coarse and Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. In this section. select Other. 146 On the View Control Bar. double-click Floor Plans ➤ Ref. This fitting geometry displays when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used. (Filter Selection). 144 On the Options Bar. Level to make it the active view. 143 In the drawing area. In Revit MEP. and verify the fitting geometry. 145 In the Filter dialog. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.

do the following: ■ For Plane. 148 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. 149 On the Options Bar. verify that 0' 0" is specified. select the left horizontal reference line. 536 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 150 In the drawing area. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. Select (Pick Lines). verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. click Model Lines. 147 On the Design Bar. Verify that Lock is cleared.Only the reference planes and reference lines display.

TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object and press Tab. select Ang. 152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 537 . This associates the angle dimension of the arced model line to the Ang family parameter. Each time you press Tab. click to lock the model line to the reference line. A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object. for Label. 156 Click Modify. 157 Select the permanent dimension. 151 With the model line selected. 154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension. select the arced reference line to create an arced model line. and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right. 155 Zoom out. you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from top to bottom). and lock the model line to the arced reference line. This converts the overall angle temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. and on the Options Bar. 153 Click Modify.A model line is created over the reference line.

162 Using the same method. 165 In the Type Selector. and modify the witness lines as shown. 169 Relocate the dimension annotations. 160 Click Modify. click the diagonal model line. verify that Angular Dimension Style : Linear angular style is selected. you dimension the diagonal model line.158 Relocate the dimension annotation. associate the new angular dimension to the Ang family parameter. 164 On the Options Bar. create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line (located at the right end of the arced model line). click Dimension. click (Angular). 161 Select the diagonal model line. and modify the witness lines as shown. Revit MEP warns you that locking the alignment would over constrain the sketch. 166 In the drawing area. NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line. convert the diagonal model line overall length temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 167 Click Modify. press Tab to locate the model line. 163 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Next. 159 Using the same method. NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line. and associate it to the LenA1 family parameter. and finally move the cursor and click to place the dimension. 168 Using the same method. If you lock it. 538 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . then click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. If necessary.

171 Press CTRL+S. Flex the part 172 On the Design Bar. you flex the part to validate the design. click Family Types. Next. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 539 . enter 90. 173 In the Family Types dialog. for Ang. under Dimensions. The part flexes to become a 90 degree elbow fitting.170 On the View Control Bar. and click Apply. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.

175 In the drawing area. 176 On the Options Bar. clear Lines (Pipe Fitting) and Reference Planes. and click OK. Lines (Pipe Fittings) are the model lines. 178 On the View Control Bar. Everything except for model lines and reference planes are selected. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view. Next. 177 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Check all constraints and verify that model lines were created and properly constrained. Add tick marks and dimension them You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or Medium (single line) detail level. you create tick marks. this is usually caused by a constraint issue.NOTE If the part does not flex and errors occur. 540 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click (Filter Selection). 174 Restore the Ang parameter to 45.

TIP You draw this model line on top of the Coupling reference plane. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 541 . 180 In the Type Selector. Verify that Radius is cleared. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 181 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the diagonal model line as shown. 182 At the left end of the fitting. Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. click Model Lines.Only model lines and reference planes display. Line length is approximate. do the following: ■ For Plane. 183 At the right end of the fitting. draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the horizontal model line as shown. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. 179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line. and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark). 186 On the Options Bar. then move the cursor to the left and click to place the dimension. The 2 tick marks are drawn. verify that (Aligned) is selected. 188 Using the same method. 542 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane and click the top end point of the model line (tick mark). 187 On the left end of the fitting. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Linear is selected. 185 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking the diagonal model line first. 189 Using the same method. The top half of the model line (tick mark) is dimensioned. length is approximate. Next.Again. you dimension each side of the 2 tick marks. dimension the bottom half of the left model line. 184 On the Design Bar.

You cannot select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter. select CplRad This associates that dimension to the CplRad family parameter. click (Angular). 192 Using the same method. You may need to zoom out to locate the lock. and modify the witness lines as shown. 193 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. you create an angular dimension between the diagonal model line and the right model line tick mark. Next. 194 On the Options Bar. associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter. The dimension are as shown. 197 Select the angular dimension. for Label. and lock it to 90 degrees. 195 Click the diagonal model line and then click the right model line tick mark.You place 2 dimensions for the right model line. 196 Click Modify. move the cursor down and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. 190 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 543 . 191 Select the lower dimension for the left model line. 198 Relocate the dimension annotations.

202 In the Family Types dialog. The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 3 inch diameter. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ .199 On the View Control Bar. Flex the part 201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Family Types. 200 Press CTRL+S to save the family. and for NomRad enter 1 1/2".Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. for Ang. and click Apply. enter 90. 544 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .

205 On the Options Bar. you set object visibility. click (Filter Selection). on the Options Bar. NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 545 . You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate it. click Visibility. 206 In the Filter dialog. the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe diameter that is not included in the lookup table file. you specify this single line geometry to a detail level setting.203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values. clear Fine. and click OK. 207 With the model lines selected. verify that Coarse and Medium are selected. This specifies that the single-line fitting geometry will display when only the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are selected. 208 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK.csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on the manufacturers’ specifications. select Lines (Pipe Fittings). cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. Next. Next. 204 In the drawing area. click Check None. You may want to refer to the Threaded Generic Elbow. you specify the 2-line geometry for the Fine detail level setting. Only model lines are selected. Specify object visibility You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail level setting. Next.

216 In the drawing area. click Visibility. 546 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 219 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. select Fitting from the system type list. select Dimensions. You begin by placing the primary connector. 214 Press CTRL+S. and verify that Face) is selected. The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected. on the Options Bar. The fitting displays. 211 In the Filter dialog. verify that Fine is selected. 222 On the Options Bar. 212 With the sweeps selected. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 218 In the Filter dialog. 220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting. Add connectors 215 In the Project Browser.209 In the drawing area. 213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). 210 On the Options Bar. 221 On the Design Bar. Next. and click OK. 217 On the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. you add connectors to the elbow fitting family. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view. click (Filter Selection). click Pipe Connector. click to place the primary connector. (Place on 223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting. and after the edge highlights. clear Coarse and Medium. click None. click None. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. Only the 3 sweeps are selected. select Other.

You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis. You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view. the primary connector must be placed on the face that is on the X-axis. NOTE When you place fitting connectors. 224 Using the same method. and that if all connectors are not properly rotated and linked.The primary connector is placed. Notice that crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 547 . place a connector on the left face of the fitting. Unexpected behavior can result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors.

select ■ . under Instance Parameters. The 2 connectors are linked. select NomRad. Although the connectors are round. The 2 selected connectors display in red. Next. you specify connector properties. verify that Fitting is selected. click Link Connector. you rotate the connectors. select Ang. 229 On the Options Bar. click OK. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Rotate connectors 231 In the 3D view. This allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing. and click OK. click . For Angle. Next. 227 On the Options Bar. 230 In the Element Properties dialog. It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. ■ ■ For Radius. The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally. In the Element Properties dialog. it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they are oriented vertically.225 Click Modify. do the following: For System Type. 548 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Notice that values are assigned to both associated parameters. 226 Select the primary connector (indicated by crosshairs). 228 In the drawing area. and click OK. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select the 2 connectors. Next. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click . you link both connectors. ■ The connector radii change. and that these parameters cannot be edited in the Element Properties dialog. and click the other connector.

233 Select the connector. If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly. 232 Spin the fitting to view the entire primary connector. creating an unexpected result. Remember that for rectangular connectors. The height is not on these axes.IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement. click to specify the rotation start point. 234 Move the cursor over the model line and to the left of the connector arrow. Although this is not as important for round connectors. where the part geometry is clearly visible. The connector orientation determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. the rectangular duct fitting will be inserted improperly. and on the Options Bar. You may find it easier to rotate connectors in a 3D view. and click to specify the rotation end point. click (Rotate). Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 549 . 235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees. it is extremely important for rectangular connectors such as those on rectangular duct fittings. the rectangular connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes. and after the intersection snap displays.

550 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . This also flips the connector arrow. rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation. You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section. you verify the connector arrow direction. 236 Using the same method.NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane. Next. 237 Press CTRL+S to save the family. The primary connector is rotated and now has a vertical orientation.

Because Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 551 . click Load into Projects.rte template. IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being created to complete a connection. Under Create New. 241 In the New Project dialog. The Systems-Default template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project. 243 On the Design Bar. This is the default view when a project. verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its connector as shown. In most instances. It does not indicate flow direction. opens.rte template file. then click Browse. If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default. 242 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded Generic Elbow. The 1 . The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active. verify that the path points to the Systems-Default. 239 Press CTRL+S. 244 In the Project Browser. based on the systems default template. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Template file. verify that Project is selected. select the project that you just created from the Load into Projects dialog. the duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it.rfa . a new project is created based on the current project template.Verify connector arrow direction 238 In the 3D view. you load the threaded elbow family into the new project. a connector arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated. Test the elbow fitting in a project 240 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Next. TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options).3D View to switch back to the threaded coupling family. and click OK. NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar. This template may not be the Systems-Default template. and locate this template file. verify that the 1 . If more than one project is open.Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view. You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows. Otherwise. Click OK.

it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech view. 245 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type. 246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. 247 On the Options Bar, click .

248 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 249 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Elbow, select Threaded – Generic Elbow: Threaded – Generic Elbow, and click OK twice. 250 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter) select 3”. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that the Offset elevation is specified at 9' 0"

251 In the drawing area, draw some piping, using various angles and offset elevations. NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file. 252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.

You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed properly. Next, you check connectivity. Check connectivity 253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity. The piping highlights indicating that it is connected. 254 Click Modify. Hide shape handles 255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view. 256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.

552 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow. Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.

258 Drag the upper triangular shape handle upward as shown.

Notice that this shape handle modified the fitting geometry.

Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 553

IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected. This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings, duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference lines and all reference planes that are used for that family. 259 Press CTRL+Z to undo the modification. 260 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded - Generic Elbow.rfa - Floor Plan: Ref. Level to switch to the elbow family floor plan view. 261 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing, including reference planes.

262 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

263 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Reference Planes, and click OK. Only the reference planes are selected. 264 On the Options Bar, click .

265 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK. 266 Using the same method, specify Not a Reference for all reference lines. 267 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 268 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select the test project in which you tested the elbow fitting, and click OK. 269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. The test project becomes active. 270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout. Notice that all shape handles are hidden.

554 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The threaded elbow is ready to be used in a project. RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting, proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and drawn.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family
It is likely that you will need to create annotation symbols that are not part of a building model. For example, a common symbol in MEP drawings is a New to Existing Connection callout. In this exercise, you create such an annotation. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the New dialog, select Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open. 3 Maximize the window, and in the drawing area, zoom in to view the note (located near the intersection of the reference planes). This note contains key points to remember when creating an annotation family. 4 Select the note and delete it. 5 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the intersection of the 2 reference planes. Draw lines 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Clear Chain.

(Draw), and

(Line) are selected.

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 0 1/8, and press Enter. This creates a 1/8" line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line. 10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 1/8" lines located above, below, and to the left of the intersection as shown.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 555

TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes. 12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. This hides the reference planes allowing you to better view the lines.

Next, you create the filled regions. Create filled regions

13 On the toolbar, click

(Fine Lines).

14 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design, verify that Lines is selected. 16 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 17 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Select

(Draw) is selected.

(Arc from center and endpoints). and, select this sketching option from the list.

You may need to click

Click Radius, and enter 3/32".

18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.

556 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.

20 Move the cursor over the right horizontal line, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the end point of the arc.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 557

An arced line is drawn.

21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Click

(Draw) and Chain are selected.

(Line).

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

22 In the drawing area, click the upper end point of the arced line, then click the intersection of the 4 lines, and finally click the lower end point of the arced line.

558 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

A chain of 2 lines is drawn. 23 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. This filled region is created.

24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.

Next, you draw a circle around the 2 filled regions. 25 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Click

(Draw) is selected.

(Circle).

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 559

■ ■

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Click Radius, and verify that 0' 3/32" is specified.

27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle. 28 Click Modify.

29 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as New to Existing.rfa Test the annotation symbol in a project 30 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 32 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rvt. 33 Click Window menu ➤ New to Existing.rfa - Drawing Sheet to switch to the new annotation symbol family. 34 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 35 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 36 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Symbol. 37 In the Type Selector, verify that New to Existing is selected. 38 On the Options Bar, click .

39 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 40 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 42 In the drawing area, zoom in, and click to place the annotation symbol in the project. 43 Press ESC twice. Next, you modify the symbol leader. 44 Select the leader to display shape handles.

560 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.

46 Drag the end shape handle to modify the annotation symbol as shown.

47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol. 48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts
A defining feature of Revit MEP content is the concept of connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP content to participate in specific systems and facilitate calculations for a variety of parameters.

Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.

Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and others.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts | 561

Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.

Connector Properties
The discipline assigned to a connector determines the connector’s properties. The following tables show the different connector parameters, by property group, for each discipline and a brief description of their functionality.
Electrical Constraints Edge loop centered Graphics Size on screen Electrical - Loads True Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 3) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 2) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 1) x (Power Factor). Percentage of power attributed to this connector. Active only when Power is specified as System Type. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >2. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >1. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor. Connector placement method (read only).

True Load Phase 2

True Load Phase 1

Power Factor

Apparent Load Phase 3

Apparent Load Phase 2

562 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Apparent Load Phase 1

Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current). Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power. The voltage specified on the connector. Active only when the System Type is Power. Possible values are: Data, Power - Balanced, Power - Unbalanced, Telephone, Security, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, Communication. Possible values are: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. Possible values are: Lagging, Leading. Possible values are: 1, 2, or 3.

Apparent Load

Voltage

System Type

Load Classification Power Factor State Number of Poles Identity Data Index Primary Connector

A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. A description of the connector

Connector Description

Mechanical (HVAC) Constraints Edge loop centered Angle Connector placement method (read only) Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Flow Factor Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

Connectors | 563

Loss Coefficient Flow Configuration Flow Direction System Type

Active only when the Loss Method is Coefficient. Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Undefined. Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.

Loss Method Mechanical - Airflow Pressure Drop Flow Dimensions Shape Height

Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss. The amount of air flowing at this connector.

Possible values are: Rectangular or Round. The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The radius of the connector when the Shape is defined to be round.

Width

Radius

Identity Data Index Primary Connector A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only) A description of the connector

Link Connector Index Connector Description

Mechanical (Piping) Constraints Edge loop centered Connector placement method (read only).

564 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Angle

Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration is Fixture Units. K Coefficient (K Factor) is only editable if Loss Method is specified as “K Coefficient”. Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector. Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated. Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K Coefficient, Specific Loss. Possible values are: Checked or unchecked. Possible values are: Undefined, Hydronic Supply, Hydronic Return, Sanitary, Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot Water, Fire Protection, Other. Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Projecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

K Coefficient

Flow Factor

Flow Pressure Drop Flow Configuration Flow Direction

Loss Method

Allow Slope Adjustments System Type

K Coefficient Table

Dimensions Radius Identity Data Index A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). The nominal size of the connector.

Connectors | 565

Primary Connector

Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only). A description of the connector.

Link Connector Index Connector Description

System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.

Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.

Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).

Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems. When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply, Return, Other.

When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).

When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).

566 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Load Classifications
Revit MEP maintains information about loads associated with the rooms in a project. As devices and equipment are placed in rooms, Revit MEP keeps track of the loads based on load type: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. The loads associated with the room can be view in the Element Properties for each room, and displayed in schedules.

Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:

Place on Face This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier to use, and is suitable for most cases. Place on Work Plane This option allows placement of the connector on a selected plane. For many cases it would be possible to imitate the place on face option by specifying a plane and using dimensions to constrain the connector to the desired location. However, this method generally requires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively.

Connectors | 567

NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front / Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.

Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside. When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or otherwise. When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.

Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family, titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You must start the family with the appropriate template.

Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv) file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file. The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue) Where: Is:

568 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

result LookupTableName LookupColumn

the returned value. the name of the CSV file to lookup. the name of the column from which the result value is to be returned. the value that will be returned if LookupValue is not found. the value to find in the first column of the table.

DefaultIfNotFound LookupValue

CSV File Structure
The first row of values in the CSV file is for header information, to describe the contents of subsequent columns. The headers are of the format ParameterName##ParameterType##ParameterUnits Acceptable parameter types are: NUMBER, LENGTH, AREA, VOLUME, ANGLE, and OTHER For example, a column may have the following header: TotalArea##AREA##INCHES to represent the total area in square inches. The first column in the file contains a description. The Lookup Function processes the information in the file starting with column 2.

Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped (associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking (small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited. The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the parameters to which they have been mapped.

Parameter Mapping | 569

Category
Revit MEP components fall into general categories (pipe fittings, lighting fixtures, and so on). The Family Category specified when a family is created determines which Family Parameters are activated. The settings for these family parameters affect the behavior for the part and identifies the type of component. In Family Editor, the Family Category and Parameters settings are found in the Settings menu. Depending on the Family Category and the type of template that the family was derived from (host-based, generic model, detail component, generic tag, and so on), different Family Parameters apply. The following table lists each Family Category, and indicates the applicable Family Parameters. Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver- Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation Shared

Air Terminals Communications Devices Data Devices Duct Accessories Duct Fittings Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Fire Alarm Devices Generic Models Lighting Devices Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Nurse Call Devices Pipe Accessories Pipe Fittings Plumbing Fixtures Security Devices

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

570 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The part type serves 2 functions: ■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. To determine the part type family. Pipe Fittings. Equipment. Exit. Duct Accessories. the Part Type values available depends on the family category. Duct Fittings. you can specify the shape of the light element (point. Plumbing Fixture Part Types Damper. Part Types The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family category. line. Hood. for fittings it would not be valid to replace a cross with a transition. Part Type: See Part Types on page 571. Mechanical Equipment. you can adjust the position and brightness of each light source to achieve the desired lighting effects. Undefined. However. ■ If a family category provides a Part Type parameter. hemispherical. Elbow. Fan and System Interaction. spot. the part type must be defined. This allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. The following table shows which part types apply to which family categories: Family Categories Air Terminals. Light Source A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP. such as Light Loss Factor. circle). Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the database. Junction.Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver. Entry. Valve Light Source | 571 . and determines the behavior for the parts in the family. In a project. For example. Transition. and Initial Color Control. Initial Intensity. Generally the Type Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category. Duct Mounted Equipment. In general. as is the case with receptacles and switches. To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a chandelier or a set of track lights). When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Obstruction. or photometric web). rectangle. Pipe Accessories. there are times when this is not appropriate. You can also define photometric characteristics. each lighting fixture family has one light source. create a nested family. The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP.Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation X X X Shared Sprinklers Telephone Devices X X X X X X Family Parameters ■ ■ ■ Light Source: See Light Source on page 571. and the light distribution (spherical.

Nurse Call Devices. Telephone. and light fixtures. Electrical Fixtures. inline fans Hood: Kitchen. Lighting Fixtures. grills. Lighting Devices. Electrical Equipment. grates Exit: Point at which fluid leaves the system Equipment: Generic equipment Fan and System Interaction AHUs. such as an inline filter Transition: Shape or size change Undefined: No specific functionality Valve: Valves and similar accessories Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data. Transformer. Security Devices.Family Categories Communication Devices. Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box. Fire Alarm. Switch Junction Box ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Damper: Used to control flow volume. Data Devices. Nurse Call. Security. lab or other exhaust hoods Junction: Intersection of 3 or more segments (tee. Panelboard. Normal: Devices such as receptacles. ■ ■ ■ ■ 572 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Data Panel. Switchboard. Controls. wye) Obstruction: Anything that causes a pressure drop. the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch. and Communication. Telephone Devices Part Types Normal. Fire Alarm Devices. Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device. steam generators Elbow: A bend or elbow type fitting Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers. Duct Mounted Equipment: Smoke detectors. As indicated in the image. fire alarm components. cross. As indicated in the image.

■ Part Types | 573 . Transformer: Used to interconnect Panelboards and/or Switchboards of differing voltages.■ Switchboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules.

574 .

We wish to thank BNIM Architects. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and a roof garden. lofty ceilings. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. 575 . the existing building shell will be maintained and restored.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. slight modifications to the building design have been made. exterior fire stairs. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2009. NOTE For training purposes. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. balconies.

576 .

You learn how to create new views from existing views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 577 . and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model. how to create section and elevation views. including plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 10 In this tutorial. elevation. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. section.

Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 578 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt.

enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 579 . 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. expand Floor Plans. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

12 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. enter Vicinity Plan. 580 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Vicinity Plan. 11 Under Floor Plans.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. under Floor Plans.

click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. Next. and click 1''= 80'-0''. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.14 On the View Control Bar. Duplicating Plan Views | 581 .

582 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt.16 Right-click. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

rvt. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. select Elevation: Building Elevation. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. for Scale. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. click Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1/8''=1'-0''. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 583 . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

8 On the Design Bar. 584 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Modify.

select 1/8''=1'-0''. 14 In the Type Selector. under Elevations. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. double-click South East. and double-click Level 1.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter South East. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 585 . 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. under Views (all). select Section: Building Section. click Section. for Scale. ■ Move the cursor down. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.

and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 586 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. click Split Segment. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 587 .19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

23 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Section 1. 24 Select gridline F. expand Sections (Building Section). click Modify. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 588 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . using the blue circular drag grip. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.

click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 589 . you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view.

for Scale. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Callout.rvt. 590 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Floor Plan.Resulting callout view .

and select the callout boundary. click Modify. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views | 591 .■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

click Modify. 592 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 On the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 9 In the Rename View dialog.■ Select the middle grip. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.

12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Callout Views | 593 . select Detail View: Detail. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. click Callout. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. 13 In the Type Selector. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. for Scale. select 1 1/2''=1'-0''.

under Detail Views (Details). expand Detail Views (Details).16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click OK. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 594 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Roof Overhang Detail. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the Project Browser. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.

you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 595 . the elevation markers.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You change the appearance of the section mark head.

click Training Files. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar.Custom. enter Section Head – Custom. for Section Head. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. and click Open. 10 On the floor plan. select Section Head . The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Project. Section Tail . click Edit/New. select Custom-Section Head. and click OK. and can be applied to the section line. select the section line. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK twice. 12 For Section Tag. Section Tail – Filled. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. clear any others.rvt. 596 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rfa. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project.Filled. . double-click Level 1. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. and click OK. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.

27 Click OK twice. scroll to Section Line. and select 2. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. . click Training Files. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select Custom-Callout Head. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. notice the circular elevation markers that display. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click the Annotation Objects tab. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 597 . select Circle. select 3.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Elevation Tag. 19 Click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. and select 3. 15 Under Category. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. enter 3/4''. select 3/4'' Circle. For Line Weight.rfa. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. On the floor plan. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. On the floor plan. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. scroll to Section Marks. 22 In the Name dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Click OK. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. 17 Under Category. enter 3/4'' Circle. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. and click OK. For Dimensions ➤ Width.

for Callout Tag. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. enter 1/4''. For Corner Radius. select the callout. 36 In the drawing. and click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and select 7. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 40 Press ESC. 598 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Edit/New. 39 Click OK twice. select the current project. click Duplicate. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. clear all others. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 43 Under Category. and click OK.30 On the Design Bar. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. click Load into Project. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 34 In the Name dialog. .

you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. You learn to create view templates. expand Callout Boundary. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and apply it to multiple elevation views.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. click Training Files.45 For Line Pattern. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 49 Click OK. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To accomplish this. and select 4. Creating a View Template In this exercise. filters. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. and visual overrides. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 599 . select Dash. 46 Under Category. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. view regions. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. masking regions.

600 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and features blue triangular grips and break marks. The crop region displays as red. under Visibility. 5 On the View Toolbar. and double-click East. clear Entourage. click Zoom to Fit. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. under Elevations. 4 On the View Control Bar. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Hide Crop Region).Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser.

right-click East. Creating a View Template | 601 . click OK. under Elevations. grids. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. elevation markers. 16 In the Project Browser. Callouts. levels. and click Create View Template From View. 13 In the Project Browser.10 Under Visibility. and section lines are now hidden in the view. double-click North. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. under Elevations. 14 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. 15 In the View Templates dialog. 12 On the View Control bar.

602 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. right-click North. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 19 Using the same method.rvt. under Floor Plans. and click OK. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 18 In the Select View Template dialog. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. click Apply. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. double-click Penthouse. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. edit the crop region as before. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views.rvt. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser.

select Penthouse. select Level Below (Level 4). Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. for Bottom. click Edit. right-click.2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level Below (Level 4). Under View Depth. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Click OK twice. View Range and Plan Regions | 603 . under Extents. for View Range. double-click Roof Plan. for Level. under Floor Plans.

8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Roof Plan. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Plan Region. Click OK twice. under Extents. for View Range. for Level. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth.6 In the Project Browser. for Bottom. right-click. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. click Lines. select Level 4. click Edit. select Level 4. 604 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Properties. 10 On the Design Bar.

for View Range. click Edit. select Unlimited. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. Click OK twice. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. for Level. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Finish Sketch.11 On the Options Bar. for Bottom. In the left corner of the building. 17 On the Design Bar. the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 605 . in this case. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Move you cursor diagonally. click Region Properties. click Modify. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 13 On the Design Bar. Under View Depth. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. select Unlimited.

5 In the Filters dialog. click (New). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Enter Hr. After you apply the filter. under Projection/Surface. Select contains. and apply a color. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. click Override under Patterns. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 12 On the Filter tab. under Basic colors. select Solid Fill. 11 Select Rated Walls. 17 Using the same method. select the red color. 606 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Categories. and click OK. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. click Add. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. and click OK. select Walls. for Color. 1 In the Project Browser. enter Rated Walls. 16 Click OK.rvt. for Rated Walls. for Pattern. 9 Click OK. click <No Override>. 10 On the Filter tab. click Edit/New. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. and click OK. click the Filters tab. 14 In the Color dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. and double-click Level 1. select Fire Rating. expand Floor Plans. under Views (all). under Filters. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rating of the walls.

The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View | 607 .18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Remove. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click OK.

right-click.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 608 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 On the View menu. and click OK. as shown. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click Show Crop Region. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. under Floor Plans.

and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. select Invisible lines. 9 On the View Control Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Masking Region. click (Rectangle). 12 On the Options Bar. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. Masking Portions of a View | 609 . 8 Select the crop region.7 On the View menu.

and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 1 In the Project Browser.14 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. right-click Unit 18 Plan . NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 610 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.rvt. under Floor Plans.Level 1. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. click Finish Sketch.

enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 11 Click OK twice. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click in the Patterns field. and click Rename. right-click. and click OK. click <No Override> to apply a color. 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Solid fill. for Color. and click OK. under Visibility. right-click. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 Under Cut. and click 1/4''=1'0''. Working with Visual Overrides | 611 . 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Override. for Pattern. under Pattern Overrides. click black. select Walls. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click the current scale.

16 Under Visibility. click Modify.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 612 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Visibility. clear Grids. clear Floors. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 18 Right-click. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.

click Override. for Pattern. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color. 23 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 25 Click OK twice. Working with Visual Overrides | 613 . for Color. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Lines. and click OK.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. select Dash 1/16''. 20 Right-click. By using the previous method to make the selection. click a purple color. 21 Under Projection/Surface.

click Modify.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Projection Lines. click . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. 28 For Color. select a bright green color. click By Category Override. 614 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 29 In the Color dialog. select the sofa. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. right-click. 30 On the Design Bar.

34 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. how to add views to the sheets. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 33 On the View Control Bar.32 Select one of the lamps. click . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 615 . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click. click Training Files. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.rvt. and click OK. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and click View. 616 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Sheet. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets.

enter Site Plan.Unnamed. Click OK. 5 When the title block highlights. 3 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. For Sheet Number. enter A101. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . For Sheet Name. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click Modify. and select the title block. expand Sheets (all). on the Options Bar. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Creating Drawing Sheets | 617 .

NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. under Other. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Number. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter J. for Project Address. 2009. Smith. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 618 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Freighthouse Flats. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 14 Click OK. For Client Name. enter For Approval. For Project Name. enter 15 May. For Project Status. enter 2009-1.

enter Floor Plan. right-click. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 17 In the Project Browser.Elevations A105 . and click OK.Stairs In the following exercise. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . you add views to these sheets.Elevations A106 . Adding Views to Sheets | 619 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.Elevations A107 . and click Rename. for Name.rvt.Sections A108 .Layout Plan A104 . 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click Save. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. select the new sheet name.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

6 In the Project Browser. double-click A104 . Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 620 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. double-click A102 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place the view.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Floor Plans.Elevations. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all).Floor Plan. click Modify. and drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). The red border around the view no longer displays. 4 On the Design Bar.

10 Under Sections (Building Sections). Adding Views to Sheets | 621 . 8 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.Sections. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click A107 . and click to place it. click Modify. under Sheets (all). click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. align it with the East elevation.

click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). for View Scale. and click to place it.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. zoom in to the grip. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 16 Select title bar. . 622 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and press TAB until it highlights. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 18 Under Floor Plans. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. double-click A108 . and click OK.Stairs. move the cursor over it. click Modify.

Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 623 . 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. you must first activate the view on the sheet. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. double-click Level 1. In order to do this. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and then make changes and deactivate the view. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise.

Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. enter 54'. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. right-click. double-click A107 .Sections. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Activate View. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER.rvt. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 624 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 Select the building section view. click Modify. under Sheets (all).

double-click North. and click Deactivate View. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 625 .6 Right-click. 7 In the Project Browser.

Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 626 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. Click OK. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. enter Title Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Camera.rvt. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 3 In the Project Browser. After you create the sheet. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 7 Place the camera as shown. The camera view displays. enter T. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. and click Properties. select the new sheet name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. For Sheet Name. double-click Level 1.

10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 627 . Under Extents. 11 On the View Control Bar. For Target Elevation. Under Camera. for Eye Elevation. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. enter 420'. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. select Far Clip Active. For Far Clip Offset. enter 60'.8 On the Options Bar. enter 5'.

drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. Under Model Crop Size. 14 Under 3D Views. click Size. 628 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click Apply.Title Sheet. double-click T . 15 With the view selected. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.13 In the Project Browser. select Scale (locked proportions). for Height. enter 25''. on the Options Bar. and then click OK. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. under Sheets (all).

click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and close the exercise file. for Show title. 22 In the Name dialog. under Graphics. select No.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. . click Modify. 19 Select the view on the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 629 . and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 24 Click OK twice. enter Viewport/no title mark. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.

630 .

expand Floor Plans. Tagging Objects In this lesson. Because of the open style floor plan. 631 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Level 1.Tagging and Scheduling 11 In this tutorial. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. such as doors and windows. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. such as room and window schedules. in your Revit MEP 2009 projects. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also learn to create different types of schedules.

and click Room and Area. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 632 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. as shown: 5 Using the same method. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). click Room Separation. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. move the cursor to the right.

Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.6 Using the same method. click Load. click Modify. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 633 . 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Tags dialog.

13 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the tag number.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Modify. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Room. 11 In the Tags dialog. verify that Tag on placement is selected. The room tag number displays in blue. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. indicating that it can be edited. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and click to place the room and tag. 16 On the Design Bar. type 8'. and select the room tag. 14 For Offset. click Training Files. click it. 634 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK. type U18-1.rfa. and the rectangle contains the room tag.

NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also supported. Click to place the new room and tag. 22 Click the room text label. 23 Using the same method. click Room. place rooms and tags. click Modify. type Entry. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. click Modify. type Kitchen.18 Click the room text label. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and press ENTER. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 635 . ■ 21 On the Design Bar. Dining. and press ENTER. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 19 On the Design Bar.

28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. expand Lines.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. on the Model Categories tab. 27 On the Design Bar. clear Room Separation.Level 2. 29 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK. but they need to be tagged. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and moving clockwise. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 636 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Tag. The rooms are already placed. click Modify.

in the Project Browser.Level 1. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you learn how to place door and window tags. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 637 . clear Leader. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.rvt. click Tag ➤ By Category. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar.

type U18-2. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. and click OK. 638 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. click Properties). and on the Options Bar. (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identify Data. type U18-1. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family. for Mark. and press ENTER.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. Tagging Doors and Windows | 639 .9 Using one of the methods you just learned. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

rfa.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser.Level 2. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 22 In the Tags dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. and click OK. 15 Under Category. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click OK. click Training Files. verify that All objects in current view is selected. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 20 In the Tags dialog. select Window Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. and double-click Level 1. 13 On the Design Bar. select Door Tags. and click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 640 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . expand Floor Plans.

select Leader. 29 Save the file. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. select the edge to which the leader connects.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. click Training Files.Level 1. click Yes to load a tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 5 At the confirmation prompt. Tagging Other Objects | 641 . and modify the tag placement and display. 3 On the Options Bar. 28 Using the same method. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.rfa. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. tag all untagged windows. 4 Select a dining room chair. double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 26 Under Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag.

13 Optionally. 9 Click Modify. 14 Click Modify. 642 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . clear Leader. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 11 Select the tag for the table. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. and drag it up to form an angled leader. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. and drag it above the chair tag. 12 Click the elbow control.8 Select the furniture in the living room. and on the Options Bar.

Tagging Other Objects | 643 . click Modify. double-click Unit 18 Plan . select Furniture Tag : Standard. 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Design Bar. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. under Floor Plans.Level 2. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. click Tag All Not Tagged.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. and click OK.

You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. click (Filter Selection). Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson.20 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Filter dialog. 644 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Check None. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. 22 In the Type Selector. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. and click OK. 23 Save the file. select Furniture Tags. and click Modify. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. you learn to add schedules.

you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. in which windows are listed by window type. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Window Schedule | 645 . that is. a schedule that lists every window in the building. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Next. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. select Comments and click Add. and double-click Level 1. 7 Using the same method. click Training Files. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 4 For Name.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click View. 6 Under Available fields. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. type Building Window Schedule. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. 646 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Schedule/Quantities. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. select Windows. 9 Click OK.

11 If the confirmation dialog displays.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. NOTE By clicking Show. click Show. right-click the schedule. and on the Options Bar. in large building models with many views. If no open view shows the selected element. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. you are prompted to open one that does. However. 13 In the Project Browser. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. click Close. and click View Properties. Creating a Window Schedule | 647 . this can be a time-consuming process. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. expand Schedules/Quantities.

The window type schedule is displayed. and press ENTER. for Sort by.15 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. 648 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . for Sorting/Grouping. clear Itemize every instance. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. The window schedule is displayed. sorted by type mark. click Edit. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule. 23 Click OK twice. click Edit. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. under Other. for Sorting/Grouping. and click View Properties.

In this case. and double-click Building Window Schedule. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 649 . you cannot use them to tag objects. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. expand Schedules/Quantities. and sill conditions for a window can be found. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. jamb. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. unlike shared parameters. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types.

right-click Building Window Schedule. and click Properties. Select Type. click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. 650 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Construction. for Name. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. type Head Detail. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. for Fields.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. so that they are listed before Comments. select the following fields. 6 Using the same method. 5 Click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 12 Click OK twice. click Add to create the new parameter. under Other. For Group parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. under Available fields. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. click OK.

for Jamb Detail. type Unit 18 . TIP To select all 3 headers. select Head Detail. Under Name. for Head Detail. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. under Type Mark A. You then hide the column used for the filter.Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Doors. type 3/A107. 17 Save the file. click Group. and for Sill Detail. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . type 1/A107. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. 14 On the Options Bar. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 651 . expand Floor Plans.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. Jamb Detail. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. and Sill Detail. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. type Window Details. type 2/A107. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. For example.Door Schedule. and without releasing the left mouse button.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. click in the Head Detail header. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 4 Click OK. Select contains in the second field. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 10 Under Fields. 6 Under Available fields. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. select Hidden field. verify that New Construction is selected. and double-click A102 . expand Sheets (all). select the following fields. select Mark. Type U18 in the third field. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. and click OK. 11 Under Field formatting. but is not included as a column in the schedule. click the Fields tab.■ For Phase. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18.Unit 18. 652 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Family and Type. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab.

The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width.13 In the Project Browser. click Modify.Door Schedule. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 19 On the Design Bar. click Unit 18 . and drag it to the sheet. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 653 . 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

select Number. right-click in the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 654 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. under Available fields.20 Save the file. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields.rvt. and click View. select Rooms. and click OK. to the right of Header text. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 5 Using the same method. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. select Bold. under Floor Plans. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. 8 Click OK. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 7 Under Text. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.

select Corridor. 101-106. type Storage. For 106. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. and press ENTER. add 5 more rooms. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. type Corridor. click New. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. for room 101. and press ENTER. For 102. For 103. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. for Name. next to Rows. select Storage. Creating a Room Schedule | 655 . The room Number is U17-46. 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. type Building Entry. For 104. and press ENTER. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 105. type Stair.

you add room separation lines. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. and click OK. For Room Separation. 4 Click OK twice.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. under Visibility. click the bright green swatch. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select 9. click Override. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. First. click Room Separation. draw the horizontal line. click the Color field. click the Lines field. Under Custom colors. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. double-click Level 1. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. under Projection/Surface. place rooms from a program list. expand Lines. In the Line Graphics dialog.13 Save the file. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 656 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and modify room names. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. For Weight. In the Lines field.

click Room.8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 657 .

12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 For Offset. for Room. 11 On the Options Bar. 658 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select 101 Building Entry. for Room. type 8'. select 102 Storage.

16 Using the same method. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. double-click Room Schedule. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 19 In the Project Browser. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 20 While pressing CTRL. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar. and zoom in to the Corridor. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). under Floor Plans. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 659 . place the following rooms.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). double-click Level 1. click Modify.

click New. and click Add. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 24 Open the Room Schedule. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. type As Selected. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. (Element Properties). under Category. and Wall Finish. 660 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Floor Finish. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and for all 3 finishes. clear Room Bounding. 30 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Available fields. for Rows. select Rooms. click Modify. while pressing CTRL. type Units.21 On the Options Bar. 31 For Key Name. select Base Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Select Schedule keys. under Constraints. click 23 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Room Style Schedule displays without data.

and click Properties. right-click Room Schedule. select Units. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. for Room Style. 33 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. click (Element Properties). under Identity Data. for Available fields. 44 On the Options Bar. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. select Room Style. click (Filter Selection). 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. under Other. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 36 Click OK twice. 37 Open the Room Schedule. for Fields. and click Add. click Check None. and click OK. 43 In the Filter dialog. double-click Level 1. for Room Style. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 661 . 38 Under U17-8. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. under Floor Plans. 34 In the Element Properties dialog.32 Using the same method. 42 On the Options Bar. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. select Units. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule.

right-click Level 1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. and 106. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. click 5 For Title. 104. and click Properties. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. For rooms 102 and 105. 103. and click OK. type Room Type. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Room Style. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan).rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. and apply it to the Level 1 view. under Views (all). under Graphics. click OK. and double-click Level 1. at the warning prompt. 48 Save the file. for Name. (Duplicate). select Service. type Room Type. for Color. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Public. 662 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. click the Color Scheme field. 9 In the Project Browser.46 Open the Room Schedule. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

under Visibility. 14 Click OK twice. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 663 . and clear Room Separation. select the color legend. clear Visible. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. expand Lines. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit Color Scheme. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Schemes. 19 On the Options Bar. click Color Scheme Legend. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click the value in the Color column. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). select Room Type. click Edit. click Modify.

on the Options Bar. and click OK. under Graphics. (Element Properties). 23 Using the same method. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. type 1/4''. click Edit/New. under Custom color. 28 Under Title Text. 24 Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. 664 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. and select Show Title. select blue. 29 Click OK twice. click Modify.22 In the Color dialog. respectively. type 1''. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. for Swatch Width. for Size.

for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. and select Properties. right-click Building Section. under Sections. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. for Color Scheme. and click OK. 35 Click OK twice. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. under Sections. under Visibility. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 665 . Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. select Rooms. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. under Graphics. double-click Building Section. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Color Scheme Legend. click Edit. select Room Type.

45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. for Room Style. click . click Check None. select Rooms. 42 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 46 Click . under Identity Data. select Public.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. (Filter Selection). and click OK. and click OK. select all the rooms in the stairwell. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Units. 41 On the Options Bar. 666 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .

click New. excluding the stairwell spaces. 54 While pressing CTRL. under Schedules/Quantities. type Suites. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. double-click Room Style Schedule. 51 On the Options Bar. and click .Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. and click OK. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 667 . under Key Name for the new row. select Service. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. for Rows. for Room Style. under Identity Data.

but not beyond it. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that At wall finish is selected. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. under Identity Data. The color fill will extend to the roof. for Room Style. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. and click OK. and click OK. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 59 Under Room Area Computation. under Volume Computations. 668 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . The color fill extends to the roof. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Areas and Volumes.55 Click . select the room on the left side of the top floor. select Suites.

for Upper Limit. 72 On the Design Bar. 66 Click OK. 67 On the first level. type 0’ 0” . select Level 2.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 68 Click . 64 In the Element Properties dialog. select Loft. 70 For Limit Offset. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 669 . click Modify. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. under Constraints. the dining room. for Upper Limit. select the stairwell room. type -10”. 71 Click OK. . select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). and click 65 For Limit Offset. and the living room.

Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. 670 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. double-click {3D}. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.73 Save the file. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.

add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. under Category. click Family and Type. Creating a Material Takeoff | 671 . 5 On the Design Bar. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. For Then by. 9 Using the same method. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Material: Description. under Available fields. select Roofs. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Select Grand totals. click Modify.EPDM. and click Add. 3 While pressing CTRL. Clear Itemize every instance.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Family and Type. 4 In the Type Selector. and click OK.

The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. type Estimated Cost. 12 Click OK. under Available fields. and click Add. Under Field formatting. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. and under Fields. and click Properties. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Material: Cost. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. under Other. 23 For Field formatting.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. click Edit. select Currency. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Estimated Cost. click the Formatting tab. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. select Material: Area. and click OK twice. for Name. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 19 For Type. 20 For Formula. select Calculate totals. select Calculate totals. 17 Click Calculated Value. for Material: Cost.75 672 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . for Fields. 21 Click OK. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2).25 4.50 1.

either within family components or within the project template. select $. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. In this lesson. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. 29 Select Use digit grouping. click the Format value. for Currency. you create an exiting plan for the building. you create a shared parameter file. and schedule the total distance of each path. 30 Click OK twice. regardless of category. creating a generic tag to tag the family. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. not just for currency. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. tag the line. adding the shared parameters to a family. can be used for any number-based parameter. ensuring consistency across families and projects. which inserts commas after every three digits. You draw a travel path line.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. Digit grouping. These shared parameters can be added to any family. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost . 26 In the Project Units dialog. for Rounding. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 673 . Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. and reporting the shared parameters. and are defined and stored in an external file. 28 For Unit symbol. The cost fields are formatted correctly. 31 Save the file. 27 In the Format dialog.

and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. and click OK. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.txt.rvt. type OfficeStandardsParameters. under Groups. type Path ID. click New. for Type of Parameter. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. select Length. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. for File name. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Create. 7 Under Parameters. for Name. for Name. 11 Click OK twice. click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 9 Under Parameters. under Floor Plans.rvt. and click Save. and click OK. 674 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Training Files. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. type Exiting. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. type Travel Distance. click New.

Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. select Shared parameter. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 4 In the Family Types dialog.rvt.rfa. for Travel Distance Formula. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 15 If necessary. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 675 . group it under Dimensions. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 11 Click OK. click Add. 3 On the Design Bar. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK. click Add. and click Select. 13 Click Apply. following the equals symbol (=). for Group parameter under. type Length. and click OK. click Load into Projects. under Parameter Data. under Parameters.rvt. 14 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. If you have multiple projects open. in the Load into Projects dialog. 8 Select Instance. 10 Using the same method. 9 In the Family Types dialog. Click Training Files. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Parameter Type. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Constraints. and click OK. under Parameters. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and select Instance. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. You then create a generic tag to tag the family.

20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag. click (Add Parameter). 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Label dialog.Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click parameter(s) to label). 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. under Parameters. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. select Travel Distance. click Label. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Training Files. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. click Select. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 676 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Label.rft. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 24 Click OK twice. under Category Parameters. select Travel Distance.

and click Save. and move it down. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and press DELETE. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 677 .28 On the Design Bar. 29 In the drawing window.rvt is selected. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. click Modify. for File Name. click Load into Projects. select Path ID. type Travel Distance Tag.rfa. 35 Save the file. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 32 In the Save As dialog.

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. After the lines are tagged. click Component. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. select Chain.Level 1. double-click Exiting Plan . you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 6 Move the cursor to the right. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. and click in the center of the corridor. above the exterior door as shown.Placing.Tagging. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. 678 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.

Placing. click Modify. move the cursor near the right corner. double click Exiting Plan . under Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category. select the 2 dashed travel lines. type 1-1. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 679 . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 12 On the Design Bar. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 13 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. and click outside of the building. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. and click (Element Properties). click Component. through the door.Level 2. clear Leader.Tagging. for Path ID. 17 On the Options Bar. verify that Chain is selected.7 Move the cursor down. click Modify.

and click. 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. click Component. and click above the door to the stair. move the cursor to the left. 23 Move the cursor down.19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. 680 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .

25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 33 For Name. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. under Constraints. for Path ID. type 2-1. 30 Using the same method. click Modify.Tagging. click Modify. 27 On the Design Bar. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 28 While pressing CTRL. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 681 . Placing. .24 On the Design Bar. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. under Category. and click OK. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. type Level 1 Exit Distance. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category.

for Filter by. 46 In the Project Browser. select Path ID. and click OK. 38 For Sort by. 43 In the Project Browser. 36 For Filter by. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 41 Under Fields. 35 Click the Filter tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. 49 Click OK twice. and click Add. under Other. 50 Save the file. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Rename. select Path ID and Travel Distance. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. select Travel Distance. in the second field. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. and in the third field. click Edit. type Level 2 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. in the third field.rvt. in the first field. type 2-. select Calculate totals. click Training Files. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 682 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. while pressing CTRL. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. select contains. under Available fields. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. type 1-. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter. and under Field formatting. under Schedules/Quantities. select Path ID. 44 In the Project Browser.

and select C1010145 . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Partitions . and click .Fixed Partitions. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. for Assembly Code. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and click Properties. click Schedule/Quantities. under Categories. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. under Identity Data. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 4 Under Available fields. 9 Click OK twice. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click the Design Bar. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. and click View. and click OK.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .6''. select the following fields. select Walls.Interiors ➤ C10 . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 683 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Value field.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Generic . expand C .Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . click the Fields tab. 10 In the schedule.

mdb. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. select a location for the database file. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. In the left pane of the Open dialog.11 Close the exercise file. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 1 On the File menu. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click the File Data Source tab. click Training Files. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database.mdb). the database display may be different than that shown.rvt. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click OK. 6 Click Finish. 8 In the New Database dialog. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click OK to create the database. type Revit_Project. 11 Click OK 3 times. for Database Name. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click Next. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Create. 3 Click New. 684 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 9 Under Directories. and click Next. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. under Database.

One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Additionally. in addition to the Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. 13 Close the exercise file. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. For example.Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 685 .

686 .

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 687 . you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.Annotating and Dimensioning 12 In this tutorial. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2009 projects.

the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. 688 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

3 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the Level 1 line. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. for Elevation Base. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.Shared Elevation.rvt. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click South. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. type 1/4'' Head . Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. select Shared. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click OK twice. In the Name dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. and click OK. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. Relocating a Project | 689 . click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit/New. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. expand Views (all). click (Element Properties). 4 In the Element Properties dialog. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. The levels in the project are not shared. However. Under Constraints. If you did that now. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

10 On the View menu. select Level : 1/4'' Head . and press ENTER.Shared Elevation. 12 In the Type Selector. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. type 325'. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.By selecting the Level 1 line. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. 690 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. click Modify. you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. you specify the new location of the project. The base elevation now reads 325'. The south elevation is displayed. By typing 325' in this step.

select Levels 2-4. as well as other views of the building model. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. double-click North. 14 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Relocating a Project | 691 . The changes in elevation have propagated to this view.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. the Penthouse level. and the Roof Plan level.

and angular dimensions. On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name.■ ■ In the Type Selector. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. multi-segmented. 692 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . In Revit MEP. Dimensioning In this lesson. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. click Modify. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. In this case.Shared Elevation. click File menu ➤ Save As. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. radial. select Level : 1/4'' Head . 17 Proceed to the next lesson. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. Dimensioning on page 692. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. permanent dimensions are created automatically. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. You place linear. 16 If you want to save your changes.

expand Views (all). snap to wall centerlines. and double-click Level 1. select it. expand Floor Plans. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar.Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. and are created by selecting individual reference points. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 693 . By default. dimensions are aligned. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Dimension. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall.

694 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to place the dimension. select it. and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. 5 Move the cursor above the view.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view.

and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 695 . 7 On the Design Bar. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. The lock displays as locked. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. click Dimension. and select it.

and select its left exterior face. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter. but below the first dimension that you placed. for Prefer. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 16 Move the cursor up. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 14 Move the cursor to the right. select Wall Faces. select the right endpoint of the planter. 12 On the Options Bar. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. above the plan view of the building. 696 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .11 Using the same method. select the right side of the curtain wall.

select Ordinate. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. . Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. enter Linear . Creating Dimensions | 697 .Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. 25 In the Name dialog. enter Linear . View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. select Baseline. click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. and on the Options Bar. for Dimension String Type. 18 On the Basics tab.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. for Dimension String Type. click Modify. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Duplicate.3/32" Arial .3/32" Arial . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog.Baseline. under Graphics. and click OK.

. 698 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Below. select Linear . enter Planter.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. 34 Click OK. under Dimension Value.3/32" Arial . and in the Type Selector. 30 In the Type Selector. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog. or to the right of a permanent dimension value. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. below.Baseline. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. for example Text dialog displays. select Linear . 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. verify that Use Actual Value is selected. to the left.29 Select the dimension string. 33 Under Text Fields.

Creating Dimensions | 699 . 37 On the Design Bar. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. click Modify. and specify a point to place the dimension. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. and select it. click Dimension. click Modify. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. For Prefer. select Wall faces. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall.

700 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click the dimension text. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. 46 On the Basics tab. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog.42 Select the radial dimension. 44 With the dimension still selected. type Typ.. for Suffix. and click OK. click Modify.

verify that Wall faces is selected.Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. Creating Dimensions | 701 . 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter. For Prefer. click Dimension. 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). 50 Select the horizontal line.

you select only the wall.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. and double-click Level 3. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 702. When you dimension the wall. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. and click to place the dimension. 702 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 53 On the Basics tab. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Modify. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

For Pick.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. click Dimension. and select Widths. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. select Openings. Click Options. Click OK. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 703 . select Wall centerlines. select Entire Walls. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. and click to place the automatic dimension string.

and double-click Level 1.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. When you place dimensions. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 704 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. in some cases. for a multi-segmented dimension. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. expand Views (all). Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. However. click Modify. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.7 On the Basics tab. For example. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. Controlling Witness Lines on page 704. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions.

For Pick.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. and select it. select Individual References. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. Controlling Witness Lines | 705 . verify Wall centerlines is selected.

move the cursor down. 706 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select it. select the bottom right endpoint.7 Using the same method. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. and click to place the dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. select the right edge of the planter. 10 Using the same method.

13 On the Options Bar. select it. Controlling Witness Lines | 707 . select Wall centerlines. for Prefer.11 Move the cursor down. click Dimension. and specify a point to place the dimension. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. and when the wall centerline highlights.

19 Release SHIFT.15 Moving the cursor to the right. 16 On the Design Bar. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 708 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and click to place the dimension. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. and drag the dimension down the wall. click Modify. 18 While pressing SHIFT.

and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. drag it to the right. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 709 . 22 On the Basics tab. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. click Modify. you change the dimension tick mark. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 709.20 Click the blue middle grip. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. text font. After you create the new family type. and using the same methods.

2 Click (Element Properties).rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. type Office Standard. and select the lower dimension. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 710 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Tick Mark. select Arrow 30 Degree. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Name dialog.

for Text Size. select another font. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 7 On the Basics tab. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 711 . NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. select CityBlueprint. type 1/8”. ■ Click OK twice. and select the bottom dimension. click Modify.■ ■ Under Text. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. For Text Font.

Creating Text Annotation on page 712. select the angular dimension on the planter. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. and how to add leaders to the text notes. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building.11 Using the same method. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. 712 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . create a new angular dimension type. 12 Proceed to the next lesson.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Text. but below the upper dimension string. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. and click and drag to create a text box. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click (None). 3 On the Options Bar. zoom to the planter near grid line 5.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 713 . for Leader.

and click OK.5 In the text box. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Modify. type 1/4'' Arial Notes. select Arc Leaders. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. type 1/4''. 10 In the Name dialog box. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. and click OK. If so. under Graphics. 11 Under Text. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 714 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Text Size. type EXISTING BUILDING. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 7 Select the text box.

and type Planting Bed. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 715 . ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. Click (Add Left Arc Leader).

and click OK.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. for New. Click Rename. Click OK twice. In the Rename dialog. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. for Leader Arrowhead. 20 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. for Text Font. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 716 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Modify. click Modify. Under Graphics. select CityBlueprint. type Standard Notes. Under Text.

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 31 Click in the text box. 27 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 717 . Wall. select Text: Standard Notes. and type 18'' Conc. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. click Text. click to place the text box. and click Modify. over the Planting Bed text. click (Arc). for Leader. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

click File menu ➤ Save As. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 718 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name.32 If you want to save your changes.

you trace over the building model geometry. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2009. In order to detail from the building model. add detail components. These components display at the required scale. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. In the callout view. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. like a standard door header condition. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. and metal studs. 719 . Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. plywood. you detail the roof overhang of a project building.Detailing 13 In this tutorial.

select As underlay. 720 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. which means that all detail components. You load detail components. and click OK. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. you detail the view of the roof edge.rfa. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. They are also view specific. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. The roof overhang detail displays. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Detail Component. 5 In the alert dialog. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. After you add components.Detailing the View In this exercise.rvt. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the drawing area. double-click the detail callout head. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and insulation objects. click Training Files. region objects. as well as detail lines. Exact location is not important. and click Open. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Repeating Detail. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1' 4". 13 In the Name dialog. click (Element Properties). 17 In the drawing area. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 15 For Spacing. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 16 Click OK twice. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. select Corrugated Metal. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK.8 Delete the component. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. Detailing the View | 721 . 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point.

Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 24 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. and click Open. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click (Move). 22 On the Options Bar. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. 722 | Chapter 13 Detailing . ■ ■ Click Modify.rfa. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.19 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Modify. click Training Files.

click OK. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8. 29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. you load them as a group from a single file. Detailing the View | 723 . 30 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view as shown. 31 To properly orient the component. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. press SPACEBAR 3 times. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6.rvt. 33 In the Type Selector. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog.Because you still have several components to load. and click Open. click Training Files.

select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8".Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment. and click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows. select Chain. 724 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 37 Click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.

select to near side. as shown. click Insulation. 42 Click Modify. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. enter 5 1/2". and on the Edit toolbar. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. (Move). For Offset.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. Detailing the View | 725 .

Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. click Detail Component. 47 In the Type Selector. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2". 45 In the Type Selector. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. as shown. 726 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select Plywood-Section : 3/4". 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component.■ Click Modify. and lock the component. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 51 Click Modify. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector.

select Thin Lines. select Thin Lines. as shown. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. and press ENTER. you add lines to your detail. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist. 4 Click Modify. 2 In the Type Selector. For Offset. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. Adding Detail Lines on page 727. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 727 . meaning they display only in this view. Like detail components.52 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. they are view specific. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. enter 1/4". click Detail Lines. 5 Select the vertical plywood component.

enter 1/4". as shown. 16 On the Options Bar.10 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and draw the detail lines as shown. click Detail Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. select Medium Lines. select Chain. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. and press ENTER. click (Draw). as shown. and clear Chain. 11 In the Type Selector. 728 | Chapter 13 Detailing . For Offset.

right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select the Penthouse level line. 24 On the View Control Bar.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. and click OK. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. draw the detail lines as shown. and click Properties. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. When you turn the display model off. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select Do not display. right-click. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. Adding Detail Lines | 729 . the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 18 In the Type Selector. 22 In the Project Browser. select Thin Lines. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.

enter 1/2". click Detail Lines. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 730 | Chapter 13 Detailing . For Offset. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Vapor Barrier. 29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 26 In the Type Selector. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 30 In the Type Selector.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. and press ENTER. select Break Line.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes | 731 . click Text. Click again to specify the location of the text box. you add text notes to complete the detail. click Dimension.32 Click Modify. Enter the text.rvt. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. Adding Text Notes on page 731. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. and click to place the dimension.

11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click the dimension text. and click OK. right-click. right-click. for Suffix. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Filter Selection). and click OK. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and click Rename. and press DELETE. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog.7 Click Modify. click Select All Instances. enter Roof Overhang Detail . i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating Detail Components on page 732. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes.Keynotes. 9 In the Dimension Text dialog. on the Options Bar. click 6 In the Filter dialog. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail.. select a text note. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the dimension line. right-click. under Text Fields. enter Typ. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and click OK.rvt. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and save the exercise file. 732 | Chapter 13 Detailing .

and selecting the chain. select Medium Lines. Creating Detail Components | 733 . 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 16 Click Modify. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and click Open.rft. in the Type Selector. select all the coping linework. pressing TAB. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 14 Click Modify. 7 Click Modify. while pressing CTRL.

The original linework remains selected. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 26 Press DELETE. 30 In the drawing area. delete the underlying linework.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click it in the Project Browser. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . 18 In the Save As dialog. 31 Using the same method used previously. and click Save. 22 Click Modify. and click OK. click Detail Component. click Detail Component. 25 In the Filter dialog. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. enter Roof Edge. and the component can be placed in the detail. click Load into Projects. click Load. for File name. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 Using a window. 21 To place the component.rfa. navigate to your preferred location. 27 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. select the coping. clear Detail Items. 734 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Keynotes view is not the open view. 28 On the Options Bar. Adding Keynotes on page 735. and click Open. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. While pressing SHIFT. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail .

B5. use keynote 06160. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. Click to place the leader arm. Adding Keynotes | 735 . and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. and click OK.rfa.rvt.Adding Keynotes In this exercise. For the metal coping. In the Keynotes dialog. and click Open. you place keynotes on objects. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. use keynote 07645.D11.C1. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. Roof Edge4. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the alert dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 3/4" Plywood. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation.

7/8" Corrugated Steel . 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties). the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 17 Keynote the component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. use keynote 09250. use keynote 06160. select Corrugated Metal. FasciaProfile_1. For the 2x6. 736 | Chapter 13 Detailing . For the 2x8. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 15 In the Type Selector.A8.6 Click Modify. 11 Click OK 3 times. click in the Value column. use keynote 06110. using keynote 07460. For the 2x12. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. You do this in order to keynote the component. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area.I1. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard.D11. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. use keynote 06110. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110.D1. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 737. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. navigate to 07645. 18 Save the file. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.20 Ga. click Edit/New.G1. and click . and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog.F1. click Detail Component.F1.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 737 . 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click Load. click Training Files. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 16 Select the component. click Lines. click Load into Projects. 20 Click OK 3 times.rft. and click Open. for File name. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Save As dialog. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 6 Lock the line. 19 In the Name dialog.rvt. 15 Click Modify. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. select the left end point of the reference line. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select Medium Line Detail Component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. and select the right end point. and click Save. select Medium Lines. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 In the drawing area. 11 Press DELETE. and click (Element Properties). 17 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to your preferred location. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. and click Modify. 4 In the Type Selector. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 13 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.

name the component 2 x 8 Framing. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. against the 3/4" plywood. 29 In the drawing area. 30 Click Modify. 41 Select the component just added. click Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. click in the Value column. You add the components to the project and keynote them. click Duplicate. on the Edit toolbar. and click . click Training Files. click Detail Component. and click the lower end at the break line.G1. and click Open. 35 In the Type Properties dialog.A5. and click . 31 Select the component. 44 On the Design Bar. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. and click .23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 42 Using the same method used previously. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 38 On the Design Bar. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 25 Next. 27 On the Design Bar. 40 Click Modify. select i_Light Line Detail Component. invisible. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. and i_Light Line Detail Component. i_Invisible Line Detail Component. name the component Air Barrier. (Move). 28 In the Type Selector. and click . 48 Using the same method used previously. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 738 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Detail Component. and assign it keynote 07260. 37 Click OK 3 times.A1. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 47 Select the component. and hidden) used in the view. 49 With the component selected. and assign it keynote 06110. 34 In the Name dialog. 24 While pressing CTRL. 46 Click Modify. enter EPDM Membrane.

55 Click Modify. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. click Detail Component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. and click . select Chain. leaving the detail component lines. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 52 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 739 . 53 On the Options Bar.

Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.rfa. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible Lines. 740 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 61 In the drawing area.A4. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component. 68 In the drawing area. Air Barrier. 60 On the Design Bar. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 67 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 63 In the drawing area. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. select the component. in the Type Selector. click Load into Projects.rfa. 2 x 8 Framing.58 Using the method used previously. click Keynote ➤ Element. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. name the component Vapor Barrier. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260.

and click OK. select all the keynotes.txt. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar.rvt. 9 In the drawing area.. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 70 Using the method used previously. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click OK. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes.69 Select the component.A9. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. navigate to 07463. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 741. click Browse.A4. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. add a keynote for the component. Enter 07463. and press TAB. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. 71 In the drawing area. Enter 07460. 72 Save the file. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and click . ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 741 . select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). name the component Batt Insul. under Keynote Table. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.A1. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click Keynote ➤ Element. and press ENTER. select Absolute. and press TAB. and click to place the note.A1. click File menu ➤ Save. and assign it keynote 07210. and click Open. 11 Click Modify. under Path Type. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. In the Type Selector. Each keynote displays as a simple number. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the text editor. and close the text editor. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click to place the leader. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog.txt. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. The database file opens in a text editor.

for Scale. select Black and White. 742 | Chapter 13 Detailing . After you create a drafting view.dwg. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. These details do not update with changes to the building model.Center to Center is selected. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. For Colors. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 13 Click Modify. For Positioning.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. and click OK. verify that Auto . you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Training Files. 14 Save the file.rvt. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. select 3" = 1'-0". The detail that you import is in DWG format. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library.

double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 6 In the Project Browser. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. and click OK. click Callout. Creating a Reference Callout on page 743. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. The detail is imported as an import symbol. and click Rename. select Reference other view. Creating a Reference Callout | 743 . 6 Select the callout. 5 Click Modify. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 7 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.■ Click Open. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click Drafting 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.

10 In the Rename dialog. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar.Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. for New. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. and double-click the callout. double-click A105 . The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New./Sect. The callout is updated with the sheet information./Details. and click OK.No Reference).No Reference. enter Detail . delete the existing value. and click Properties. 744 | Chapter 13 Detailing . right-click EPDM Metal Coping. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 9 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Rename. 12 Click OK twice. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.Elev. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail .

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 745 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.18 Save the file. and click OK.rvt. click Detail Component. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 745 . There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. enter Header @ Sliding Door. for Name.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. Board. click Edit/New. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click OK 3 times. select Gypsum-Plaster. enter Gyp. and click OK. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 20 On the Design Bar.5 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. 17 Click Modify. 18 While pressing CTRL. click Duplicate. click Region Properties. for Name. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 16 Select the left edge of the region. On the Options Bar. 11 In the Name dialog. select Wide Lines. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Finish Sketch. select the width dimension. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. click . and enter 5/8". 19 In the Type Selector. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Draw a rectangle as shown. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . 746 | Chapter 13 Detailing .

(Draw). 24 Select the mirrored region. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point.Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click 22 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor up. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 747 .

and select the right edge of the wood region. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Region Properties. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click (Align). 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . for Name. Draw a rectangle as shown. 748 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.25 Click Modify.Finish. 30 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. verify that the thickness is 3/4". Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. enter Wood .Finish. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. select Medium Lines. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times. and click OK. On the Options Bar. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click (Rectangle). click Filled Region. in the Type Selector. select Wood .

sketch the new region as shown. select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 42 On the Design Bar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 38 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. click . click Finish Sketch. verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2".37 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 749 . enter 1/4". click Finish Sketch. click Ref Plane. For Offset. click Filled Region.

and click to select the point. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and click to select the point. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 750 | Chapter 13 Detailing . enter 0. click 48 Click Modify. For Offset.46 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). (Align). 47 Click the reference plane. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. enter 3/8". Move the cursor right 1". and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. For Offset. and press ENTER. Move the cursor left 1". 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor down 1'. click Filled Region. and click to select the point. Select Chain.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 751 . and press ENTER. 60 Select the left. enter 1/8". 58 In the Type Selector. top. 56 On the Design Bar. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar.54 On the Tools toolbar. and right edges of the door panel region. click Detail Lines. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. For Offset. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Sketch. select Medium Lines. and select the bottom horizontal line. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

63 Repeat for the right detail line. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 65 On the Options Bar. select the height dimension. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.61 Click Modify. 752 | Chapter 13 Detailing .rfa. 69 Select the bolt. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. enter 3". click Load. and press ENTER. 62 Select the left detail line. 68 Click Modify. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. and click Open. click Detail Component.

click Detail Lines.rfa. 80 On the Options Bar. click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. 79 In the Type Selector. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. select Wide Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. select Thin Lines. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 76 In the Type Selector. 71 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click . click Detail Component. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 753 . drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. 78 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines.70 On the Design Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 74 Select the expansion bolt. use the images as a guide.

click Detail Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. 754 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 87 Click Modify.82 Select the rectangle. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 85 On the Options Bar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. click . (Mirror).

91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 92 Select the line. 90 In the Type Selector. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. and on the Edit toolbar. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. as shown. click (Mirror). click Detail Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 755 .89 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 95 On the Design Bar. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 756 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 97 On the Options Bar. select Break Line. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. enter 1/8". 102 In the Type Selector. 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. click . 103 Add two break lines as shown. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. and press ENTER. 99 Click Modify. click Detail Component. 101 On the Design Bar. select the length dimension. and click to place the arc as shown. click Detail Lines. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

click in the Value column. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. For Rounding. click Dimension. Select Suppress 0 Feet. 113 Click OK 3 times. and on the Options Bar. The dimension display is updated.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. enter Detail Linear . select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 105 In the drawing area. the new style displays only inches. for Text ➤ Units Format. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 110 In the Name dialog. 109 In the Type Properties dialog. select To the nearest 1/16". click Dimension.3/32" Arial. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 757 . click Duplicate. . 107 Select the dimension line. 106 Click to place the dimension. click Edit/New. 114 On the Design Bar.

drag the text for the smaller dimension.115 In the Type Selector. 121 Click OK. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown.3/32”Arial. 758 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. and then click the dimension text. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. 117 Select the dimension line. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. select Replace With Text. 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click Modify. using the Drag Text grip. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . for Below. and enter Varies. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 120 Under Text Fields. under Dimension Value. enter See Schedule.

129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. under Dimension Value. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A. and click the dimension text. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 759 . 128 Click OK. select Replace With Text. 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 130 Click OK. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C.125 Select Modify to end the command.

Board. select the gypsum board region on the left. 133 In the drawing area. 135 Select the note. 139 Save the file. 760 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 138 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 134 Enter Gyp. click Text. click to create an arced leader. click (Add Right Arc Leader). and click Modify. and click to place the text. 132 In the Options Bar. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

Creating a Note Block In this exercise.Finishing the Sheets 14 In this tutorial. and double-click East.rvt. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. click Training Files. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. 761 . The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.

click Training Files.Hexagon. click Symbol. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 8 Select the keynote. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.rfa. type 1. for Number of Leaders. 7 On the Design Bar.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 762 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .

11 In the Element Properties dialog.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. for Text. and click OK. and click above the tag to place the copy. 12 On the Edit toolbar. click (Copy). click (Element Properties). on the Options Bar. Creating a Note Block | 763 . type Seal existing doors and insulate. 13 Select the tag. under Identity Data.

19 With the tag selected. on the Options Bar. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. click (Element Properties). click Copy. type Repair existing door surround. and click. type B. 764 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 18 Using the same method. 16 For Tag.14 With the copy selected. (Mirror). 15 For Text. 17 Click OK. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. on the Edit toolbar. and on the Options Bar.

Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. click Modify. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 765 . using the table as a reference. and moving counter-clockwise. Repair existing door surround. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required.21 On the Design Bar. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Repair as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. 22 Optionally. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean existing concrete loading dock.

Elevations. On the Appearance tab.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. for Note block name. for Heading. 26 Click OK. verify that Arial is selected. select Tag. type 1/4''. 29 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. for the value. 766 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. format. for Sort by. and double-click A103 . 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and click OK. On the Formatting tab. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and select Bold. 28 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). type Exterior Construction Notes. for Header text. select Exterior Construction Notes. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. select Tag. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. Create. expand Schedules/Quantities. 27 In the column header (text). and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. and for Alignment. type Description. type Mark. Clean cut and repair wall as required. Select Text. select Center.

you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.Title Sheet. double-click T .31 On the Design Bar. 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Drawing Lists | 767 . click Modify. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. under Sheets (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

and drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). 5 In the list title field. ■ 4 Click OK. select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. double-click T . in the second field. type T. 6 In the Project Browser. Select Sheet Name. change Drawing List to Sheet Index.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. and click Add. under Available fields. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. 7 In the Project Browser. for Sort by. and click Add. The drawing list displays. select Sheet Number. On the Filter tab. select does not equal. in the first field. and in the third field. expand Schedules/Quantities.Title Sheet. 768 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Sheet Number. for Filter by. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.

On construction documents. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. and door frames. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. windows. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. door frame schedule. Finally. On construction documents. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. For the text. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 11 Save the file. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Training File Using Legends | 769 . doors. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. and so on).

9 For Text Font. click Text. select Arial. type Typical Symbol Legend. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. type Legend Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. for Name. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. click Duplicate. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. click . Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Name. click Edit/New. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type 1/8''. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.Open Level Head .rvt. 770 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 10 For Text Size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. and click OK. you create a text type with the necessary size. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Symbol.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote .

drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. expand Sheets (all). 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . and click to place it. 14 Working from the top down. click Typical Symbol Legend. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. Creating a Symbol Legend | 771 . and for Leader. expand Legends. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector.Site Plan/Floor Plan. verify that is selected.

18 On the Design Bar. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 23 Save the file. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. double-click A102 .Unit 18. 772 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and click to place it. 21 In the Type Selector. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. click Modify.17 In the Type Selector.

7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. type 3'. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family.rvt. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 773 . you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. for Name. For Host length. 9 Select the second wall. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select Section. For View. 3 For Scale. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. and click OK. for Family. click Legend Component. click Modify.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. and press ENTER. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 8 On the Design Bar.

for Leader. click Text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 774 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. click to add text without a leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Selector.'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.

click to add text with a single-segment leader. The text note with leader is added to the legend. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. 18 Type the following text. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. Creating a Component Legend | 775 . 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.

drag it onto the sheet. 776 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and drag it to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Legends. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and click New Sheet.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). 24 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. 22 In the Project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. select 4th Floor Wall Types.

select the Wall Type 2 component. click Modify to end the command. click (Match Type). double-click Level 4. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. The open drawings are both visible. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 28 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Creating a Component Legend | 777 . 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser.25 On the Design Bar. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.

778 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . select Detail Level: Medium.32 In the floor plan view. 33 Select the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 34 On the View Control Bar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.

35 Optionally. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. or changes in building material availability. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. click 36 Save the file. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. These changes can be due to owner requests. contractor inquiries. double-click Level 4. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. You can create a sequence of revisions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Using Revision Tracking | 779 . Using the table.

If Visible is not selected. type a date. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. yet as concise as possible. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 5 For Description. verify that Per Project is selected. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. for Numbering. If you select Per Sheet. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. In general. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. if the active revision is number 1. 780 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . When Issued is selected. When you use this option. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. the revision is locked and issued to the field. For example. In most instances. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 7 Under Show. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1.

double-click Level 4.rvt. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. click Modify. you make changes to the project floor plan. move the cursor up. 5 Select the divider. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 9 Save the file.8 Click OK. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. including revision number and revision date. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 3 Select the divider. click (Move). Sketching Revision Clouds | 781 . You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.

click Finish Sketch.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Snaps Off. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the partition you moved. 782 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Revision Cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. In the Snaps dialog.

you load a revision tag into the project. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 783 . for Line Weight. select 6. click the Annotation Objects tab. 16 Click OK. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 17 Save the file.

click Tag ➤ By Category. click Training Files. click OK. 5 In the Tags dialog. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. You then issue a revision. and because the revision is the first in the project. 12 Save the file. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag.rvt. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Training File 784 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 8 In the Tags dialog. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 6 Click Load. 11 Click to place the tag. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. the cloud is tagged as number 1. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. under Floor Plans. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Tags. Working with Revisions In this exercise.rfa. 10 In the drawing area. Because you chose to number by project. double-click Level 4. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. you need to add one. 4 On the Options Bar. select Leader. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud.

type Modify Paving Area. select Issued. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. You do this by issuing the revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. under Sheets.Unnamed. click Add. and click OK. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. 9 Click OK. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A107 . with the description Relocate Door. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 7 For Description. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. and enter a date.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You can continue to add revisions. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 8 Add another revision row.rvt. you prevent further changes to the revision. Working with Revisions | 785 . and enter a date for the revision. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. NOTE After you issue a revision. you can no longer modify it.

Modify Paving Area. apply Seq. 12 In the drawing area. 15 On the Options Bar. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. in the drawing area.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 10 In the Project Browser. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. for Revision. select Tag ➤ By Category. 3 . under Sheets (all). 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. select the revision cloud. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. click to add a revision clouds. select Revision Cloud.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 19 To add tags. select Seq. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Project Browser. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 2 . double-click A107 .Unnamed. double-click Level 4. 11 On the Drafting tab. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 786 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 17 Using the same method learned previously.

Working with Revisions | 787 . and rotation) to the revision schedule. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. select Alphabetic. clear Issued. delete the first 3 characters. beginning with "D". For each revision. for Numbering. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. Click Options. you edit the titleblock family. for Sequence. You do this so that the revision can be changed. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. 26 In the drawing area.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. select the titleblock. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 25 Click OK twice. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. height. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family.

33 Select the schedule header. and click Properties. under Other. for Appearance. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected.27 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. select Bottom-up. 788 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click Edit. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and press DELETE. click Yes. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. click Modify. 28 In the alert dialog. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and drag it above the schedule area. Clear Blank row before data. for Build Schedule. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Edit Family. click Yes. Select Grid lines. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. click Load into Projects. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Select Outline. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 34 On the Design Bar. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. right-click Revision Schedule. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built.

for Height. 45 On the Appearance tab. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. and on the Options Bar. When the height property is variable. With a user-defined height. open the titleblock family for editing. for Heading. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. for Formatting. click Edit. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. and the most current revisions display in the available rows.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 46 Click OK twice. Working with Revisions | 789 . select the revision schedule. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. right-click Revision Schedule. 40 Select the revision schedule header. select 90° Counterclockwise. the schedule is restricted to a specific size.. select User defined. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Rotation on Sheet. enter Rev. and click Properties. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. under Other.

51 Save the file. you learn to import information (such as images. click Yes.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. 790 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . text. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. 50 In the Reload Family dialog.

Importing Image Files | 791 .Importing Image Files In this exercise. under Sheets. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project.rvt. and place it on a sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 On the Options Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Training Files. click Modify. click Text. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click to add text without a leader.Title Sheet. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.rvt. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click T . under Sheets.JPG. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click T .Title Sheet. for Leader. 1 In the Project Browser.

Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. with the new text box still selected. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 9 On the Design Bar. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 11 Save the file. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP. 6 Select the text. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. click Modify. Training File 792 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .doc text file in another window.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.

you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.Unit 18. 7 In the Revit MEP window. 1 In the Project Browser. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. double-click A102 . This exercise demonstrates a common method.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click Modify. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. for File name. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. for Name. 10 On the Design Bar.xls. 5 Click OK. click File menu ➤ Print. and click Save. This process may vary from system to system.JPG.mdi. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 4 Under Printer. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.rvt. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. click Desktop. type Fixture Schedule. Importing Spreadsheets | 793 . This step has been completed for you. select the document writer. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. click Training Files.JPG. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 3 In Microsoft Excel. under Sheets. 12 Save the file. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.

794 .

for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. as well as a large lab building. you break up the plan into sections. 795 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. To effectively document this project.Using Dependent Views 15 In this tutorial. called dependent views. or footprint. The large floor plan.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 796 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views .

you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 797 .

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area, select the crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

798 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

9 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 799

10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

800 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.)

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 801

■ ■ ■ ■

Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16', and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

802 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9. 28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8'', and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 803

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

804 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 805

46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary. 47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

806 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

51 On the View Control Bar, click Apply dependent view settings to other plans

(Hide Crop Region).

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 807

57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you
■ ■ ■ ■

Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

808 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK. 5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping the view to the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 809

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

810 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 811

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

812 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

Using Advanced Features

813

814

Grouping

16

Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical office layouts. After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.

Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

815

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.

2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

816 | Chapter 16 Grouping

5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and click OK. Creating and Placing a Group | 817 . click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. enter Typical Kitchen. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. 818 | Chapter 16 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Modify.

expand Model. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. Creating and Placing a Group | 819 . click Modify. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. under Groups. right-click Typical Kitchen.

820 | Chapter 16 Grouping . NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror).

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 821 . and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate).

21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. one mirrored. as shown. and one rotated. 822 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

you make changes to an instance of a group. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. click Save As. Modifying a Group | 823 . press TAB to highlight the wall. and click Save. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. When you finish editing. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click to select it. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.

press TAB. 4 Move the cursor over the door.3 Click (Group Member. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. and click member to group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the door. select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.).). NOTE To display an excluded element.). 7 Click (Group Member. 824 | Chapter 16 Grouping .

11 On the Design Bar. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. move the cursor to the left. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Modify.8 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 825 . clear Tag on Placement. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Door. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 13 In the Type Selector. click Modify.

17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. In edit group mode. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening.16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. move the cursor up. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Edit Group. 22 In the drawing area. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 826 | Chapter 16 Grouping .

for Unconnected Height. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. created in an earlier lesson. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. enter 3' 4''. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Nesting Groups In this exercise. click Finish.24 On the Design Bar. 25 Select the opening. 28 On the group editor toolbar. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. (Element Properties). 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. enter 7'. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. Nesting Groups | 827 . and the wall and folding doors for the closet. which acts as the host. and click OK. you add the Typical Kitchen group. click 27 For Base Offset.

i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 In the drawing area. double-click First Floor. 828 | Chapter 16 Grouping . under Floor Plans. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. select the Typical Kitchen group.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. click (Add to Group). click Edit Group. in the Project Browser.

9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. 8 In the Project Browser. select the wall between the folding doors. and each of the bifold doors. under Floor Plans. 7 On the group editor toolbar. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. Nesting Groups | 829 . double-click Second Floor.6 Press TAB.

You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. double-click First Floor. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you add door tags to a group. such as door and window tags. and filled regions. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. such as text. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. 830 | Chapter 16 Grouping .rvt. under Floor Plans. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. In the next exercise.

click to draw a rectangular region. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 831 . A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch.

click Modify. and on the Design Bar. and click OK. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 832 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 16 In the drawing area. click Text. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group). 9 On the Options Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. as shown. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 12 Enter Tile. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click to add an arc leader. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. enter Elevator Lobby Tile.

and click Create Instance. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Floor Plans. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group.18 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. under Groups. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 833 . 22 On the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Because the detail group contains variables. 21 In the drawing area. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Second Floor. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. expand Detail.

under Floor Plans. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 5 On the Design Bar. 834 | Chapter 16 Grouping . clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. as shown. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Modify. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit.manner that a drawing component can be added. double-click First Floor. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.

9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Second Floor. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 11 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Filter dialog. click (Group). click Check None. click (Filter Selection).7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. select Door Tags. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. for Attached Detail Group Name. Using Attached Detail Groups | 835 .

click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. click Place Detail. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Training File 836 | Chapter 16 Grouping . you can then work with it in the context of the new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Options Bar. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. When you load the group from the library into a new project. and click OK. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. therefore. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units.

the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. A warning dialog displays. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. under Groups\Model. Saving and Loading Groups | 837 . 3 For File name.rvt. expand Groups. click OK. and click Open. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.rvt. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. click Desktop. click Modify. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. for Create new. verify that Same as group name is selected.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. In this case. verify that Project is selected. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Save Group. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. browse to the Desktop. and click Save. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. and expand Model. accept the default template file.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Link. 24 In the message dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 838 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Remove Link. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click OK. expand Revit Links. select the linked Revit model. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Bind. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Use Existing.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 In the confirmation dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. verify that Attached Details is selected only.rvt.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. and on the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. When a group is converted to a link. and the link is removed. and click OK. click Training Files. click Modify. 20 On the Options Bar. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

To make a workset editable. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. floors. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You can enable Worksharing for any project. they cannot make changes to it.Sharing Projects 17 When working with large building projects. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. however. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit MEP 2009. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. and click Editable. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. A workset is a collection of building elements. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. When you are working on a shared project. such as walls. and so on. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you specify an active workset. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Elements specific to a view. such as annotations and dimensions. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. you must first enable Worksharing. All other team members can view this workset. The first time you activate worksets within a project. In this tutorial. called Worksharing. use Element Borrowing. After the project is shared. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. select the desired workset. doors. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Using Worksharing. go to the Worksets dialog. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. stairs. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. 839 .

you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. such as a tenant interior. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. In the next exercise. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets required for your work. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. After learning the fundamentals. In a multi-story structure. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Team size 840 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Instead. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. When setting up Worksharing. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. you can select which worksets are open or closed.

This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Experience has shown that. In most projects. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. This allows Revit MEP to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. not including the Project Standards. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. each team member has control over a portion of the design. and View worksets.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 841 . On this tab. As new members create worksets for their own use. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. designers work in teams. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Regardless of the default setting. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. When you create a new workset. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Shared Levels and Grids. You should have at least one workset for each person. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. with each assigned a specific functional task. Team member roles Typically. for a typical project.

new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. When you save to the central file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. 842 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. When you save to the central file. proceeds as usual.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. you make that workset editable by you. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Generally. however. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. For example. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. your changes propagate to the entire team. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Therefore. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. On the Options Bar. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. However. After saving to the central file. As you work. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. When finished or at regular intervals. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. your changes are saved. This makes them available to other team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. within the local file. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. When you save locally (to your local file). the file is saved as the central file. if a workset named Interior was created. This is called “Selective Open. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you can select which workset is active. you should then save to your local file.

Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 843 . You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. and make that workset editable. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. reload the latest changes from the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit MEP. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. save to the central file. In this situation. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. if you know who checked out the required workset. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. make any required worksets editable. using VPN. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you should check out the Materials workset. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Alternatively. When working remotely. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. In this conceptual exercise. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. and then save the local file. In this instance. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. for instance. To do this. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work.

and notice all are editable by you. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. under Show. The Worksets dialog displays. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets.rvt. 3 In the Worksets dialog. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. and open Common\c_Worksets. click Worksets. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 844 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects .In the next exercise." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Your username displays as the present owner. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. click Training Files.

you can rename the default workset. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. clear Visible by default in all views. a small number of team members are working on the building model. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. another is assigned the interior layout. imagine four users including yourself. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. 14 In the Worksets dialog. and Views. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Therefore. expand Floor Plans. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. ■ 5 Under Show. In this training file. and double-click Level 1. click OK. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. currently named Workset1. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Because the interior walls appear in many views. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog.When you enable worksharing. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". 12 Click Rename. select Workset1. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. 8 Click OK. type the name Exterior Shell. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Project Standards. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. In this case. 11 In the Worksets dialog. When you initially activate Worksharing. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. clear Families. click New. For example. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. it is better to make them visible by default. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 845 . Only User-Created worksets should display. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. In this simple training project. 9 Click New. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. For training purposes. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. however. You do. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. expand Views (all). Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. and click OK. 13 In the Rename dialog. 16 In the drawing area. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout.

under Identity Data. 24 On the Options Bar. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. click . You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 26 On the View menu. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. under Identity Data. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. and walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 29 Click OK. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 846 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. stairs. under Identity Data. 23 Select all of the interior elements. and click OK. 19 Click OK.17 On the Options Bar. including the interior doors. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 On the Options Bar.

The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. and click OK. click . Create the central file 37 On the File menu. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. make sure you remember the location of this central file. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 847 . In this exercise. 38 In the Save As dialog. Now that you have created the central file. click Visibility/Graphics. 32 Select Interior Layout. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. click Close. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. under Identity Data. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 41 In the Worksets dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. you enabled Worksharing on a project. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. select all of the interior elements of the building model. and click OK. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 34 In the drawing area. If any interior elements remain. 30 On the View menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. under Views (all). click Non Editable. 35 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Save. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 43 Click OK. double-click Level 2. 42 On the right side of the dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. 44 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save As. click Worksets. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. click the Worksets tab. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets.

please do so before continuing. click Worksets. click Open. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Next. and click Save. If you have not yet completed the exercise. click Options. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 13 On the Window menu. and select Specify. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 844. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. you create your local file. 12 Click OK. select the central file. In addition.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. expand Views (all). Before working on the model. and click OK. select Interior Layout. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 2 In the Open dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. 7 In the Save As dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 4 Click Open. make modifications to the building model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 6 On the File menu. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. In this case. select Interior Layout for Name. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 848 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. expand Floor Plans. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click Save As. and select Yes for Editable. check out worksets. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 15 In the Project Browser. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. select all the User-Created worksets. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button.

23 On the File menu. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. and click OK. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. If this is selected. If it was owned by another user. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies your changes. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. click Worksets. Verify that it is cleared.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. Because this element is not owned by another user. 21 On the Options Bar. 24 Click OK. notice the Editable Only option. In this case. click Modify. 20 Under Constraints. 18 On the Options Bar. however. under Identity Data. you can still edit this wall. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. Working Individually with Worksets | 849 . In the Worksets dialog. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. click . click . 22 Click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank.

27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 28 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 33 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 26 Delete the door. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Door. 31 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 850 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . The precise location is not important. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 34 In the Type Selector.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. select Basic Wall: Interior . 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. click Wall.126mm Partition (2-hr). 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Modify. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.

At the end of a work session. In this exercise. make elements editable. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. checked out worksets. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. displays the workset as well as the element type. save to central. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. If you have not yet completed these exercises. a tooltip. it is recommended. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Borrowed Elements is selected. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. When working in your local file. and save locally immediately afterward. In addition. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and reload the latest changes. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Whenever you save. you should perform regular saves. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. In this particular case. please do so before continuing. click Save to Central. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Throughout the process. leave this file open in its current state. By default. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. you created your local file. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. You modified the building model. two users access the central file through a network connection. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. you should relinquish all worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 851 . For training purposes. each user must check out worksets. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary.

Using a second Revit MEP session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit MEP window. under Username. You now have a local copy of the project. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 12 In the Save As dialog. return to the Settings dialog. consider that person to be User 1. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. skip the following section. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and click OK.rvt. This file is for your use only. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. For training purposes. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and click Save. 3 On the Settings menu.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and select Specify. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. instructions are staggered. enter User 2. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. 2 Start a new Revit MEP session by double-clicking the Revit MEP icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 15 On the File menu. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. In the following section of this exercise. select the central file. 7 In the Open dialog. 9 Click Open. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. This is a system setting. click Open. 4 Click the General Tab and. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. In addition. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. User 2: Create a local file. click Options. click Options. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and select Yes for Editable. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Worksets. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 852 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . specifically sequenced. and reset the Username to your computer login name. click Save As. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and click OK. one user has already created a local file. 11 On the File menu.

User 1: Check out worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 853 . expand Floor Plans. and select Yes for Editable. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and double-click Level 1. If you only have one workset checked out. expand Floor Plans. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes.” 29 Click OK. 19 On the File menu. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. expand Views (all). 27 On the File menu. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. it becomes the active workset. 17 Click OK. open it now. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. select the lower exterior wall. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. click Worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. If it is not open. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. expand Views (all). 24 In the Project Browser.You are now the owner of that workset. modify the building model. 23 Click OK. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. click Save to Central. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. and double-click Level 1. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide.

33 On the File menu. you should create a furniture plan view. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 44 In the Project Browser. 41 On the File menu. click Worksets. 45 In the Rename View dialog. Before adding any furniture. Click Yes. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 854 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Reload Latest. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. right-click Level 1. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 37 On the File menu. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Rename. 42 Select Furniture Layout.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. and click OK. click Save to Central. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. and click OK. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 39 Click OK. under Floor Plans. select Yes for Editable. 46 In the Project Browser. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 35 Click OK. under Views (all). However. When you save to central. click Save to Central. 43 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

65 Click OK. 62 On the File menu. enter Exterior Wall . click Save to Central. click Edit/New. the Visible by default option was not selected. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. are placed under Project Standards. 63 In the Worksets dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 855 . choose any desk. 66 On the File menu. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 60 In the Rename dialog. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Save to Central. select Project Standards.” 55 Click OK. rather than Families. Therefore. and click OK. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Component. and click inside any room. and click Element Properties. and click OK. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 61 Click OK 2 times. click Reload Latest. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. NOTE System families. such as Wall Types. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. click Worksets. click Modify. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 48 In the Type Selector. click Visibility/Graphics. 50 On the View menu.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 53 On the File menu.200mm. under Show. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 49 On the Design Bar. click Rename. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. click the Worksets tab. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall.

throughout this training. 70 On the File menu. As each of you work. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. select the following. select Reload Latest. Each user checked out worksets. click Options. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. In subsequent steps. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. and still have your local files open. leave this file open in its current state. leave this file open in its current state.rvt. you save the training file as a central file. This exercise requires two users and. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. At the appropriate point in this exercise. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and click OK. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. and published their changes back to the central file. 3 In the Save As dialog. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Checking out worksets. you need to set up your central and local files. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 856. click Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 856 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . User 1: Reload latest. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. modified the building model. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. finished the previous workset exercises. and these problems are rectified. Each user must have network access to the central file. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. In the final exercise of this tutorial. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and save 69 On the File menu. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. select Save to Central. click Training Files. There are specific instructions for each user. two users are working on the same project with separate local files.

7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 857 . You have created a local file which is for your use only. select Make this a Central File after save. This is the local file for User 1. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 5 Click Save. return to the Settings dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Options. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. In addition. 8 In the Save As dialog. select the central file. 15 Click Open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. ■ ■ ■ This Revit MEP session is now set up for User 2. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. click Options. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Open. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click Save. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK.4 In the File Save Options dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 13 In the Open dialog. 12 On the File menu. On the Settings menu. This is a system setting. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 17 On the File menu. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. click Save As. Set the Username to User 2. click Options. 6 On the File menu. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and select Specify. click Save As. and click Save. Next. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. The central file should still be open. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click OK. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 18 In the Save As dialog.

and click Editing Requests. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 29 On the Options Bar. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. You are now the owner of that workset. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. verify that Editable Only is cleared. click Worksets. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. After you submit the request. You are now the owner of that workset. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. click Worksets. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. At this point. select the Interior Layout workset. under Floor Plans. and click Open. 24 Under Active Workset. select Interior Layout. and then click OK. select them. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. if any User-Created worksets are not open. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. and select Yes for Editable. select Exterior Shell. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 26 In the Worksets dialog. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 27 Under Active Workset. 858 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. select the second window from the top. 22 In the Worksets dialog. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. and then click OK. and select Yes for Editable. double-click Level 1. Afterwards. 30 On the left exterior wall. click the File menu. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission.

User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. select the request submitted by User 2. select the following. click Close. In this case. 40 In the Save to Central dialog.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and notice the window is in the new location. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. you requested permission to edit the element. select Save to Central. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and close 39 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. click Check Now. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 859 . to Local. 35 Click Grant. 36 Click Close. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 38 Click OK. and click OK. In this multi-user exercise. and the other user granted it.

860 .

Using design options. After you and the client agree on the final design. For example. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. In this tutorial. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). 861 . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes.Creating Multiple Design Options 18 When working with a building model. At any time in the design process. you can have multiple sets of design options. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In addition. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs.

In the first exercise in this lesson. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you can edit it. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 2 In the Design Options dialog. TIP In this exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. the only available command is to create a new option set. make your final design decision. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you set up multiple design option sets. 862 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click New. The client has asked you to create various options. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. each is constructed for interchangeability. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. click Training Files. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. After you create a design option. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. therefore.In this particular case. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the second exercise. and delete the unwanted options from the project. under Option Set. each with multiple design options. In the final exercise of this lesson. the roof and structure systems must work together.rvt. With the second option. you design each of the structural options.

either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. and the third column centered between the two. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. By selecting Multiple. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. or add a dimension string between the columns. click Edit Selected. click 12 On the Options Bar. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. In this case. Creating the Structural Design Options | 863 . select: ■ ■ ■ . 4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). select Round Column: 03" Diameter. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). click Column. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and click Close. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 11 On the Edit toolbar. expand Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar.3 Select Option 1 (primary). 7 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. TIP To center the middle column. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. In the following illustration. 5 On the View menu. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. add three columns. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click Modify.

17 Zoom out and. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. When you are finished. they are difficult to see in this view. click . add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 864 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. Because of the size of the columns. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. using the same technique.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 18 On the View toolbar.

and click at its center to set the beam start point. Creating the Structural Design Options | 865 . double-click TOP OF CORE. you add the beams that span the columns. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The first click specifies the beam start point. 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Adding a beam is a two-click process. select Round Bar : 2". Next. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Use the following illustration as a guide. 21 In the Type Selector.Notice the 12 columns that you added. under Floor Plans. Zoom in on the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. The second click specifies the end of the beam. In it. 19 In the Project Browser. click Beam. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 24 Select the Beam you added previously.

This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. click 26 On the Options Bar. 866 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . zoom into the left column. and select the center of the column to add a copy. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 28 Zoom out. and click the center point. select: ■ ■ ■ . click .25 On the Edit toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. move down to the next set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar.

enter Roofing for New. click Rename. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. name the option Louvers. 43 In the Rename dialog. 41 Under Option Set. There should now be two roofing design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 37 Select Option 2 and. 36 In the Rename dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option. click Rename. click Rename. click New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 38 In the Rename dialog. 46 Under Option. enter Brackets for New. and click OK. under Option. and click OK. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 33 Click Finish Editing. under Option Set. under Option. not a new option set. enter Beam for New. under Option Set. enter Structure for New. click Rename. and click OK. under Option. and click OK. click New. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. and click OK. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). Creating the Structural Design Options | 867 . click New. 40 In the Rename dialog. select Option 1 (primary). 45 Under Roofing.

47 Under Roofing. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 52 Click Close. under Structure. select Edit Selected. select Option 2. 50 In the Design Options dialog. 868 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. When finished. Under Now Editing. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 48 Under Option. you create the second design option. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. it will resemble the following illustration. 51 Under Edit. double-click ROOF TERRACE. and click OK. name the option Sunscreen. 53 In the Project Browser. select Beam. under Floor Plans. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. click Rename.

55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Roof Beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 869 . click Align. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. click Component. Refer to the following illustration. 56 In the Type Selector. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 58 On the Tools menu. Using the Align tool requires two clicks.

click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 62 Select the beam and. Click to indicate the end point of the move. The second click represents the move end point. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 870 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 61 On the Design Bar.60 After aligning the beam. The first click sets the move start point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. on the Edit toolbar. click Modify. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.

69 Click Close. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 70 On the File menu. 67 On the Tools menu. and click Save. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. Notice that even before you close the dialog. you need this file in its current state.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. name the file. which is visible by default. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Save As.rvt. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 66 On the View toolbar. click Finish Editing. 68 In the Design Options dialog. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. i_Urban_House-in progress. Creating the Structural Design Options | 871 . That is because the brackets option is set to primary. click .

expand Views (all). 6 In the Project Browser. If you need to add dimensions. under Roofing. you design each of the roofing options. 4 Under Edit.In this exercise. and double-click TOP OF CORE. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Sunscreen. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. Under Now Editing. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The second roofing system. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. 10 Referring to the following illustration. click Edit Selected. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. The first option. 872 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . select Louvers (primary). Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. open it now. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 3 In the Design Options dialog. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. expand Floor Plans. 8 In the Type Selector. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. delete them after the rafter is in place. 5 Click Close. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. each with multiple design options to pick from. 2 On the Tools menu. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. you set up multiple design option sets. In the next exercise. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. With the second option. select Rafter 2 x 10. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. do so now. click Component. a Louver system.rvt. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. the other for beams.

You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 873 . Select Constrain. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 38' 6" for Length. 15 On the Edit menu. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. under Other. click Array. Select 2nd for Move To. Enter 5 for Number. click . 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 13 On the Options Bar.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

The space separates feet and inches. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. rather than entering 3' 3".18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. and press ENTER. when the listening dimension displays. TIP When entering a dimension value. enter 3' 3". you can enter 3 3. For example. 874 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options .

and select the louver you just placed. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and click OK. under Other. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click . Enter 34 for Number. select Louver 2 x 6. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. enter 1’. when the listening dimension displays. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. Select 2nd for Move To. click Component. 22 On the Design Bar. and click Array. 20 In the Type Selector. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. 27 For the array starting point. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 875 . 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and. click the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select Constrain. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and press Enter. 26 On the Options Bar.

876 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . The louver roof system is complete. 29 On the View toolbar. click .Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Edit. click Finish Editing. 31 In the Design Options dialog. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 30 On the Tools menu.

try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and then click Close. In this case. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. then you can modify it through the dimension. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. and double-click West. The first two points define the ends of the line. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. and click OK.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. and the third point defines the arc. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 33 Under Editing. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 877 . 43 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Project Browser. 40 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click Edit Selected. 41 Select the top of the left column. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. You will fix this in a later step. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. under Roofing. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. the top of the next column on the right. expand Elevations. select Sunscreen. click Properties. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Therefore. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. click . Click OK. 39 On the Design Bar.

45 Click OK. click . you designed each of the roofing options. Under Constraints. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. The louver roof system is complete. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. under Edit. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Under Constraints. The second roofing system. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. click Finish Editing. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. The first option. click Save. The arcs should connect. In this exercise. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. Sunscreen. 50 On the Tools menu. 51 In the Design Options dialog. 878 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. then the center arc. click Trim/Extend. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. a Louver system. you need this file in its current state.44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 52 On the File menu. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. and then click Close. 49 On the View toolbar. Select the right arc. 48 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Tools menu. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers.

Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View menu. 9 Click OK. right-click {3D}. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. 2 In the Project Browser. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you select a design. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. enter Primary Option. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. under Views (all). under Views (all). 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. tertiary. and click OK. Managing Design Options | 879 . double-click Secondary Option. click the Design Options tab. do so now. under Views (all).Managing Design Options In this exercise. and last options. under 3D Views. make it part of the building model. 5 Right-click each of the copies. 11 On the View menu. and delete the discarded design options. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. and click Duplicate. under Views (all). double-click Primary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. 4 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. After exploring the combinations. click the Design Options tab. and click Rename. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. secondary. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

double-click Tertiary Option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 19 On the View menu. and click OK. under Views (all). specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 880 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Last Option. 15 On the View menu. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option.

27 In the alert dialog. Managing Design Options | 881 . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 26 Under Option Set. 25 Select Structure. In your design options. 30 Under Option Set. 24 Under Option. click Accept Primary. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. In this case. click Yes. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. click Close. click Delete. the current primaries are no longer options. click Yes. 31 In the alert dialog. 22 On the Tools menu. Because the client has selected the design option. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. An alert is displayed. 33 In the Design Options dialog.At this point. 23 In the Design Options dialog. under Structure. 29 Select Roofing. select Beam. This was the client choice for structural. double-click Primary Option. since you no longer need them. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. select Make Primary. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. click Delete to remove the views that used options. the beam option becomes part of the model. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. The set is deleted.

you selected a design. click Save. 882 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . In this exercise. After exploring the combinations. and deleted the discarded design options. made it part of the building model. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 35 On the File menu.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model.

You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. and then add new building model elements. In the second exercise. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. This changes room definition and total building model area. demolish existing walls and doors. You create new phases. complete with schedules. In the second exercise.Project Phasing 19 In any project. You create new phases. then add new walls and doors in a different location. 883 . demolish existing construction. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the lesson and exercises that follow. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. For the client. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase.

6 On the Options Bar. regardless of phase. 4 Click Cancel. 7 Click Cancel.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. click (Element Properties). View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. expand Floor Plans. go to the Settings menu. define the units. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. When you create a new project.rvt. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. click Project Units. and click OK. As you add new elements to the building model. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Phasing. and double-click Level 1. During the demolition and renovation process. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. you do not need to change the project units to metric. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. expand Views (all). and open Common\c_Phasing. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. If you wish to do so. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. are visible in this view. In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This means that all building model elements. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. click Modify. 884 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . click Training Files. under Phasing.

clear Door Tags.Existing. are highlighted in red. under Phasing. and click Rename. Because this is a phase-specific view. 20 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. TIP If this were a multi-story building. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 11 In the Filter dialog. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. 17 Click No. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. Phasing Your Model | 885 . 12 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 1 . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. enter Level 1 . You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. right-click Level 1 . After you create the views. and click OK. right-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. all of the building model elements. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 14 On the Design Bar. right-click Copy of Level 1 . 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click Rename.Existing.Existing. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. under Floor Plans. click . select Existing. After you release the mouse button. click (Filter Selection). for Phase Created. 10 On the Options Bar.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 16 In the Rename dialog. Because this is a renovation project.Demo. and click OK. including the door tags.

The line style of the walls and doors returns to black.Demo. however. enter Composite Plan. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. Demolished. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. 29 For Composite Plan. In this case. Because of this time relationship. Existing. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under New. double-click Level 1 . a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. 27 Click New. select Existing. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 21 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. under Floor Plans.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. On a logical time line. click the Phase Filters tab. 24 In the Project Browser. Phase status is time-dependent. to which all the building model elements belong. There are five default phase filters. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. you modify these settings. 28 Under Filter Name. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. new construction occurs after existing construction. Later in this exercise. Next. under Floor Plans. You may need to zoom in to see this. for Phase.Existing. 26 In the Phasing dialog. double-click Level 1 . Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. and Temporary. and click OK. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Overridden. 886 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing .

As you click each wall. under Floor Plans. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. select the interior walls one at a time. There are two ways to demolish an element. select Demolished. under Cut ➤ Lines. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. or you can use the demolish tool. 36 Using the same method. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. 42 In the Project Browser. When you demolish the host.Existing. its display changes to a red dashed line. select a lighter blue. select the line style. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. 35 Click OK twice. Next. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. click the value for Color. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 32 In the Demolished row. Phasing Your Model | 887 .31 Under Phase Status. select red. you begin demolition. 34 In the Color dialog. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. click (Demolish). Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Level 1 . 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. you demolish all elements hosted by it. under Floor Plans. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. double-click Level 1 .Demo. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. click OK.

select Basic Wall: Interior . for Phase Filter. and click OK. under Phasing. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 46 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 In the Type Selector. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". select Composite Plan for Phase Filter.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 888 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . 52 Open Level 1 . under Phasing. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 47 In the Type Selector. click Wall. add a long horizontal wall.Existing. The demolished walls no longer display. 53 Open Level 1 . click Door. select Show Previous + New. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). for Phase Filter. 49 On the Design Bar.Demo.

Phasing Your Model | 889 . You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. All elements are displayed in this view. 60 On the View toolbar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 62 If necessary. click (Default 3D View). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.Demo.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. which are displayed as red.New. 57 In the Project Browser. The renovated building model plan is displayed.New. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. and existing shows as half-tone. because the phase filter is set to Show All. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 61 On the View Control Bar. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . regardless of phase. right-click Level 1 . Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 59 Open Level 1 . new is shown in blue.

63 Close the file. If you wish to save this file. define the units. expand Views (all).Demo. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and locations change depending on the phase of the project.New.Existing. sizes. therefore. Notice that this view is the original building model. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and new construction.rvt. and click OK. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. click Project Units. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. go to the Settings menu. expand Floor Plans. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. In the next exercise. 890 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . All room boundaries are phase-specific. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. and double-click Level 1 . demolition. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you can do so at this time. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. you can see the new walls added to the building model. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. In this view. the rooms change in both definition and size. 2 Open Level 1 . In this view. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. In this exercise.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so. You can also see that the room quantities. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. As the renovation process continues. 3 Open Level 1 . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise.

click Room Tag. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.Existing. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 6 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 10 Open Level 1 . Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. yet they have different room numbers.Demo. click Room. Use the following illustration as a guide.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.New. click Modify. and maximize the view. 5 Click OK. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 891 . 11 On the Design Bar. 13 Open Level 1 . click Room. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. In the Phasing dialog.

The two schedule views tile. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Schedules/Quantities. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. 17 On the Window menu. 16 In the Project Browser.New Construction. and double-click Room Schedule . In addition. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 892 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . In this case. 18 Open Room Schedule . That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 19 On the Window menu. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. View phase-specific room schedules. In this exercise.Existing. click Tile. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. click Close Hidden Windows. 20 Close the file.

you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In the final lesson. modify their visibility. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In these situations. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. You position the building models on the site plan. This maximizes efficiency. In this tutorial. and manage the links throughout the project. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. Comparison of alternatives on a site. performance.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. 893 .

NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. modify their visibility. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models on the site. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit MEP 2009 to automatically place it. 894 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You link two building models to the project. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. and the other is a townhouse. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. One building model is a condominium. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.Center to Center: Revit MEP places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.Linking Building Models In this lesson. NOTE The center of a Revit MEP model is the center of the model geometry. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.

If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. and click Properties. Select c_Site. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Revit MEP projects have an internal coordinate system. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit MEP model. with write permission. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. and open Common\c_Site. and click OK.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. click Training Files.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit MEP Files. click Open. this system is not exposed to the user. select the three files. 4 On the File menu. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. RELATED See the lesson. c_Condo_Complex. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 8 Clear Read-only. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking.rvt. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. and save the file there. ■ ■ Manual . you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. in the Model Linking folder that you created. click Close. Manual .■ Auto . you can do so. however. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. This option is grayed out. 5 On the File menu. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . Otherwise. Auto . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 911. click Save As. 2 On the File menu. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 895 .By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. c_Townhouse. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. this option will place the link at a predefined location. right-click. click Open. All three files now reside.

These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. For Positioning. Notice the blue detail lines. select Auto . expand Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).Origin to Origin. 11 On the File menu. 13 Click Open. 896 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Import/Link ➤ Revit.■ Click Open. and double-click Level 1. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.

Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The Move command requires two clicks. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. 15 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). After you specify the location to move to. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 897 . After you select it. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.rvt displays in the Type Selector. The linked model moves as one object. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. 17 For the move endpoint. The first c